NEMA Contactors and Starters - Tri-State Electrical Supply

NEMA Contactors and Starters 

NEMA AN16DN0AB 

NEMA Size 1 Starter 

NEMA Size 1 Contactor 

33.1 Freedom Series 

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 

Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 

Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 

Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 

Contactors—Non-Reversing and Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 

Starters—Three-Phase Non-Reversing and Reversing, Full Voltage . . . . . . . . 10 

Starters—Single-Phase Non-Reversing, Full Voltage, Bi-Metallic Overload . . . 15 

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 

Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 

Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 

Relays—Thermal Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 

C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 

33.2 A200 Series 

Contactors—Non-Reversing and Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 

Starters—Non-Reversing and Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 

Relays—Thermal and Fast Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 

Thermal Type B, Class 20, Manual Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 

Thermal Type A, Class 20, Auto/Manual Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 

Type FT Fast Trip, Class 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 

Heater Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 

Relays—Current Sensing Protective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 

33.3 Solenoids—Alternating Current 

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 

Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 

33.4 Shoe Brakes—AC and DC Magnetic 

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 

Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 

Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 

33.5 Reference Data 

Drawings 

Online 

IEC Utilization Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 

Annex A (informative) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 

Motor Ratings Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Control Products Catalog CA08102001E—August 2010 www.eaton.com 1

33.1 


Freedom Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


Product Overview 

Freedom Series starters and 

contactors feature a compact, 

space-saving design, using 

state-of-the-art technology 

and the latest in high 

strength, impact and 

temperature resistant 

insulating materials. 

Features, Benefits and Functions 

Freedom NEMA 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

Adjustable bimetallic 

ambient compensated 

overload relays with 

interchangeable heater 

packs—available in three 

basic sizes, covering 

applications up to 

900 hp—reducing the 

number of different 

contactor/overload relay 

combinations that have to 

be stocked. Fixed heater 

overloads are optional 

Electronic overload relay 

(C440) available as a standalone 

unit and assembled 

with Freedom Contactor 

A full line of snap-on 

accessories— top and 

side mounted auxiliary 

contacts, solid-state and 

pneumatic timers, etc. 

Straight-through wiring— 

line lugs at top, load lugs 

at bottom 

Horizontal or vertical 

mounting on upright panel 

for application freedom 

Screw type power 

terminals have captive, 

backed-out self-lifting 

pressure plates with 

± screws—reduced 

wiring time 

Contents 

Description 

Page 

Technical Data and Specifications 

Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 

Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 

Contactors—Non-Reversing and Reversing . . . . . . . . . . 4 

Starters—Three-Phase Non-Reversing and 

Reversing, Full Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 

Starters—Single-Phase Non-Reversing, 

Full Voltage, Bi-Metallic Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 

Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 

Renewal Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 

Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 

Relays—Thermal Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 

C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

Accessible terminals for 

easy wiring. Optional 

fingerproof shields 

available to prevent 

electrical shock 

Top located coil terminals 

convenient and readily 

accessible. 45 mm 

contactor magnet coils 

have three terminals, 

permitting either top or 

diagonal wiring—easy to 

replace European or U.S. 

style starters or contactors 

without changing wiring 

layout 

Designed to meet or 

exceed NEMA, UL, CSA, 

VDE, BS and other 

international standards 

and listings 

American engineering— 

built by Eaton, using the 

latest in statistical process 

control methods to 

produce high quality, 

reliable products 

Sized based on standard 

NEMA classifications 

Easy coil change and 

inspectable/replaceable 

contacts 

Available in open and 

NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4/4X 

and 12 enclosures 

2 Control Products Catalog CA08102001E—August 2010 www.eaton.com



33.1 

Standards and Certifications 

● 

● 

● 

Standard: designed to 

meet or exceed UL, 

NEMA, IEC, CSA, VDE 

and BS 

UL listed: UL File #E1491, 

Guide #NLDX—Open and 

NEMA 1, 4, 12 Enclosed 

CSA Certified: CSA File 

#LR353, Class #321104 

Open and NEMA 1 

Enclosed 

Catalog Number Selection 


Device Type 

A = Starter 

C = Contactor 

Device Assembly 

Configuration 

70 = Multi-speed 

1 = Non-reversing 

5 = Reversing 

Contactor Frame Size 

A = 

B = 

D = 

G = 

K = 

N = 

S = 

T = 

U = 

V = 

NEMA 

Size 

00 

0 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

Standard 

E = IEC 

N = NEMA 

Continuous 

Amperes 

9 

18 

27 

45 

90 

135 

270 

540 

810 

1215 

ISO 9000 Certification 

When you turn to Eaton’s 

products, you turn to quality. 

The International Standards 

Organization (ISO) has 

established a series of 

standards acknowledged 

by 91 industrialized nations 

to bring harmony to the 

international quest for quality. 

The ISO certification process 

covers 20 quality system 

elements in design, 

production and installation 

that must conform to 

achieve registration. This 

commitment to quality will 

result in increased product 

reliability and total customer 

satisfaction. 

NEMA Enclosure 

N = Open 

Notes 

 

For contactor only orders, add B to end of catalog number if NEMA Size 00–2, 6. 

 

NEMA Sizes 00 and 0 only. 

 

NEMA Sizes 00 and 0 only. Sizes 1–8 are 24/60 only. 

 

NEMA Sizes 4 and 5 require the use of CTs with 1-5A OL relay. Size 4 starters are not shipped as assembled units. 

Order CN15NN01 contactor and 1–5A OL (C440A1A005SAX or C440A2A005SAX) with 60–300A CTs (ZEB-XCT300). 

Short Circuit Protection 

Fuses and Inverse-Time 

Circuit Breakers may be 

selected per Article 430, 

Part D of the National 

Electrical Code to protect 

motor branch circuits from 

fault conditions. If higher 

ratings or settings are required 

to start the motor, do not 

exceed the maximum as 

listed in Exception No. 2, 

Article 430-52. 

A N 1 9 A N 0 A 5E 005 

OLR Type 

5 = Contactor only—no overload relay 

6 = Starter w/C306 bi-metal OLR 

9 = Starter w/C440 electronic overload 

For Starters 

Starter 

Mounting Option 

0 

V 

= Horizontal 

= Vertical 

For Contactors Only 

2 

3 

4 

5 

= Two-pole 

= Three-pole 

= Four-pole 

= Five-pole 

Suffix 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

H 

J 

K 

L 

N 

T 

U 

V 

W 

Y 

C440 OLR Designation 

(FVNR and FVR only) 

5E = Standard feature set 

SEL Reset, SEL Class (10A, 10, 20, 30) 

5G = Ground fault feature set 

SEL Reset, SEL Class (10, 20) 

AC Coil Suffix 

Coil Volts and Hertz 

= 120/60 or 110/50 

= 240/60 or 220/50 

= 480/60 or 440/50 

= 600/60 or 550/50 

= 208/60 

= 277/60 

= 208 – 240/60 

= 240/50 

= 380 – 415/50 

= 550/50 

= 24/60, 24/50 

= 24/50 

= 32/50 

= 48/60 

= 48/50 

C440 FLA Range 


NEMA Size 00 

1P6 = 0.33–1.65A 

005 = 1–5A 

020 = 4–20A 


1P6 = 0.33–1.65A 

005 = 1–5A 

020 = 4–20A 


1P6 = 0.33–1.65A 

005 = 1–5A 

020 = 4–20A 

045 = 9–45A 


005 = 1–5A 

020 = 4–20A 

045 = 9–45A 


100 = 20–100A 

NEMA Size 4 

300 = 60–300A 


300 = 60–300A 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Non-Reversing and Reversing Contactors 

Contactors—Non-Reversing and Reversing 

Product Description 

Non-Reversing 

Contactors are most 

commonly used to switch 

motor loads in applications 

where running overcurrent 

protection is either not 

required or is provided 

separately. Contactors consist 

of a magnetically actuated 

switch which can be remotely 

operated by a pushbutton 

station or pilot device such 

as a proximity switch, limit 

switch, float switch, auxiliary 

contacts, etc. 

Reversing 

Reversing contactors are 

used primarily for reversing 

single- or three-phase motors 

in applications where running 

overcurrent protection is 

either not required or is 

provided separately. They 

consist of two contactors 

mechanically and electrically 

interlocked to prevent line 

shorts and energization of 

both contactors 

simultaneously. 

Contents 

Description 

Page 


Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 

Kits and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 

Renewal Parts Publication Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 


Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 


Reversing, Full Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 


Full Voltage, Bi-Metallic Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 

Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 

Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 

Relays—Thermal Overload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 

Features, Benefits and Functions 

● Designed specifically for Non-Reversing 

● 

use in applications 

● Holding circuit contact(s) 

requiring NEMA ratings. supplied as standard: 

Contactors meet or 

● Sizes 00–3 have NO 

exceed NEMA standards 

auxiliary contact block 

ICS 2-1993 

mounted on right hand 

Long life twin break, 

side (on Size 00, contact 

silver cadmium oxide 

occupies 4th power pole 

contacts—provide 

position—no increase 

excellent conductivity and in width) 

superior resistance to 

● Sizes 4–5 have a 

welding and arc erosion 

NO contact block 

● Designed to 3,000,000 

mounted on left side 

electrical operations at 


maximum hp ratings up 

2NO/2NC contact 

through 25 hp at 600V 

block on top left 

● Steel mounting plate 

● Size 8 has a NO/NC 

standard on all open 

contact block on top left 

type contactors 

back and a NO contact 

block on top right back 

Reversing 

● One NO-NC side mounted 

interlock supplied as 

standard on each 

contactor for Sizes 00–8 




33.1 

Product Selection 

Three-Pole Contactors 


CN55AN3AB 


CN15BN3AB 


CN15KN3A 

Magnet Coils—AC and DC 

Contactor coils listed in this 

section also have a 50 Hz 

rating as shown in the 

adjacent table. Select 

required contactor by 

catalog number and replace 

the magnet coil alpha 

Type CN15/CN55 NEMA Contactors—Non-Reversing and Reversing 

designation in the catalog 

number (_) with the proper 

code suffix from the table. 

For Sizes 00–2, the magnet 

coil alpha designation will be 

the next to the last digit of 

the listed catalog number. 

EXAMPLE: For a 380V, 50 Hz 

coil, change CN15AN3_B 

to CN15AN3LB. For all 

other sizes, the magnet 

coil alpha designation will 

be the last digit of the listed 

catalog number. 

AC Suffix 

Coil Volts and Hertz Code Suffix Coil Volts and Hertz Code Suffix 

120/60 or 110/50 A 380–415/50 L 

240/60 or 220/50 B 550/50 N 

480/60 or 440/50 C 24/60, 24/50 T 

600/60 or 550/50 D 24/50 U 

208/60 E 32/50 V 

277/60 H 48/60 W 

208–240/60 J 48/50 Y 

240/50 K 

Notes 

 

Maximum horsepower rating of starters for 380V 50 Hz applications: 

NEMA Size 00 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

Horsepower 1-1/2 5 10 25 50 75 150 300 600 900 

 

 

 


Size 

Continuous 

Ampere Rating 

Common control. For separate 120V control, insert letter D in 7th position of listed catalog number. 

Example: CN15VND3C. 



Maximum UL Horsepower 

Single-Phase 

Three-Phase 

Non-Reversing Reversing 

115V 230V 208V 240V 480V 600V Catalog Number Catalog Number 

00 9 1/3 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 CN15AN3_B CN55AN3_B 

0 18 1 2 3 3 5 5 CN15BN3_B CN55BN3_B 

1 27 2 3 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 CN15DN3_B CN55DN3_B 

2 45 3 7-1/2 10 15 25 25 CN15GN3_B CN55GN3_B 

3 90 25 30 50 50 CN15KN3_ CN55KN3_ 

4 135 40 50 100 100 CN15NN3_ CN55NN3_ 

5 270 75 100 200 200 CN15SN3_ CN55SN3_ 

6 540 150 200 400 400 CN15TN3_B CN55TN3_B 

7 810 200 300 600 600 CN15UN3_ CN55UN3_ 

8 1215 400 450 900 900 CN15VN3_ CN55VN3_ 

For DC Magnet Coils, 

see Accessories, Pages 28 

and 29. 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Two-, Four- and Five-Pole Contactors 


Five-Pole Contactor 

CN15GN5AB 

Magnet Coils—AC and DC 

Select required starter by 

catalog number and replace 

the magnet coil alpha 

designation in the catalog 

number (_) with the proper 

code suffix from the table. 

AC Suffix 

Kits and Accessories 

● Auxiliary contacts, 

contactor mounted— 

Pages 25—27 

● 

Transient suppressor, for 

magnet coil—Page 24 

● 

Timers—solid-state and 

pneumatic, mount on 

contactor—Page 22 

Renewal Parts 

Publication Numbers 

● See Page 30 

Type CN15 NEMA Contactors—Non-Reversing 

Two-Pole 

Maximum UL Horsepower 

Non-Reversing 

Continuous 

NEMA Ampere Single-Phase (Two-Pole) Three-Phase Catalog 

Size Rating 115V 230V 208V 240V 480V 600V Number 

Notes 



For Sizes 00–2, the magnet 

coil alpha designation will be 

the next to the last digit of 

the listed catalog number. 


coil, change CN15BN3_B 

to CN15BN3LB. For all 





Four-Pole 

Non-Reversing 

Catalog 

Number 

Five-Pole 

Non-Reversing 

Catalog 

Number 

00 9 1/3 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 CN15AN2_B CN15AN4_B — 

0 18 1 2 2 3 5 5 CN15BN2_B — — 

1 27 2 3 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 CN15DN2_B CN15DN4_B CN15DN5_B 

2 45 3 7-1/2 10 15 25 25 CN15GN2_B CN15GN4_B CN15GN5_B 

3 90 25 30 50 50 CN15KN2_ — — 

4 135 40 50 100 100 CN15NN2_ — — 

5 270 75 100 200 200 CN15SN2_ — — 

6 540 150 200 400 400 CN15TN2_B — — 


120/60 or 110/50 A 380–415/50 L 

240/60 or 220/50 B 550/50 N 

480/60 or 440/50 C 24/60, 24/50 T 

600/60 or 550/50 D 24/50 U 

208/60 E 32/50 V 

277/60 H 48/60 W 

208–240/60 J 48/50 Y 

240/50 K 







33.1 


Wire (75°C) Sizes—AWG or kcmil—Open and Enclosed 

NEMA Size Power Terminals Line or Load Control Terminals Cu Only 

00 12–16 stranded; 12–14 solid Cu 12–16 stranded 

0 8–16 stranded; 10–14 solid Cu 

12–14 solid 

1 8–14 stranded or solid Cu 

2 3–14 (upper) and/or 6–14 (lower) stranded or solid Cu 

3 1/0–14 Cu/Al 

4 250 mcm–6 

5 750 kcmil–2, or (2) 250 kcmil–3/0 Cu/Al 

6 (2) 750 kcmil–3/0 Cu/Al 

7 (3) 750 kcmil–3/0 Cu/Al 

8 (4) 750 kcmil–4/0 Cu/Al 

Plugging and Jogging Service Horsepower Ratings 

NEMA Size 200V 230V 460V 575V 

00 — 1/2 1/2 1/2 

0 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 

1 3 3 5 5 

2 7-1/2 10 15 15 

3 15 20 30 30 

4 25 30 60 60 

5 60 75 150 150 

6 125 150 300 300 

Notes 

 

Two compartment box lug. 

 

Maximum horsepower where operation is interrupted more than 5 times per minute or more than 10 times in a 10 minute period. 

NEMA standard ICS 2-1993 table 2-4-3. 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Dimensions 

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 

Non-Reversing Contactors—Open Type 

G 

A 

U 

X 

G 

A 

U 

X 

Dimensions and Shipping Weights 


Size 

A 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

G 

A 

U 

E 

X 

Auxiliary 

D 

Contacts 

Mtg. Holes for 

#10-32 Screws 

Sizes 00, Two- to Four-Pole 

A 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

D 

Number 

of Poles 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

G 

A 

U 

E 

X 

Wide 

A 

F 

C 

Side 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

Auxiliary 

Contacts 


#10-32 Screws 

Sizes 1–2, Five-Pole 

F 

C 

Side 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

High 

B 

Deep 

C 

Note 

Center mounting slot at bottom supplied only on Size 00 and 0 contactors. 

B 

B 

G 

A 

U 

X 

A 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

Mtg. Holes for (2) 

5/16-18 Screws 

G 

A 

U 

E 

X 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

Auxiliary 

D Contacts 


#10-32 Screws 

Sizes 0–2, Two- and Three-Pole 

D 

Mounting 

D 

Mounting 

E F G 

Shipping Weight 

Lbs (kg) 

00 2–4 1.75 (44.5) 3.88 (98.6) 3.49 (88.6) 1.50 (38.1) 3.38 (85.9) 4.62 (117.3) 0.54 (13.7) 1.7 (0.7) 

0 2–3 1.75 (44.5) 3.88 (98.6) 3.49 (88.6) 1.50 (38.1) 3.38 (85.9) 4.62 (117.3) 0.54 (13.7) 1.8 (0.8) 

1–2 2–3 2.56 (65.0) 5.05 (128.3) 4.44 (112.8) 2.00 (50.8) 4.50 (114.3) 5.80 (147.3) 0.54 (13.7) 3.1 (1.4) 

1–2 4 3.44 (87.4) 5.05 (128.3) 4.44 (112.8) 2.00 (50.8) 4.50 (114.3) 5.80 (147.3) 0.54 (13.7) 3.6 (1.6) 

1–2 5 4.32 (109.7) 5.05 (128.3) 4.44 (112.8) 2.00 (50.8) 4.50 (114.3) 5.80 (147.3) 0.54 (13.7) 4.0 (1.8) 

3 2–3 4.08 (103.6) 7.17 (182.1) 5.94 (150.9) 3.00 (76.2) 6.63 (168.4) — — 8.5 (3.9) 

4 2–3 7.05 (179.1) 9.11 (231.4) 7.25 (184.2) 6.00 (152.4) 8.50 (215.9) — — 20.0 (9.1) 

5 2–3 7.05 (179.1) 13.12 (333.2) 7.78 (197.6) 6.00 (152.4) 12.50 (317.5) — — 23.0 (10.4) 

6 3 8.63 (219.2) 13.54 (343.9) 8.88 (225.6) 4.33 (110.0) 8.63 (219.2) — — 35.0 (15.9) 

7 3 11.02 (279.9) 19.30 (490.2) 11.46 (291.1) 6.89 (175.0) 11.02 (279.9) — — 100.0 (45.4) 

8 3 13.00 (330.2) 24.50 (622.3) 13.63 (346.2) 4.22 (107.2) 14.86 (377.4) — — 160.0 (72.6) 

F 

C 

Side 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

B 

Side 

Mtd. 

Aux. 


1/4-20 Screws 

Size 3 

G 

A 

U 

X 

A 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

G 

A 

UX 

E 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

F 

C 

Side 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

Auxiliary 

D Contacts 


#10-32 Screws 

Sizes 0–2, Two- and Three-Pole 

A C A C 

A 

D 

E 

Size 6 

E 

C 

Mtg. Slots for (2) 

5/16-18 Screws 

B 

B 

D 

E 


(3) Screws 

Sizes 4–5 

B 

B 




33.1 


Reversing Contactors—Open Type 

G 

A 

U 

X 



Size 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

Wide 

A 

A 

D 

A 

D 

Note 

 

Includes cross wiring. 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

G 

A 

U 

X 

E 

Auxiliary 

Contacts 


#10-32 Screws 

High 

B 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

F 

C 

Side 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

Deep 

C 

B 

Sizes 00–2 Size 3 

Sizes 4–5 

E 

C 

Mtg. for (4) 

1/4-20 Screws 

B 

A 

D 

Size 6 

Mounting 

D 

Mounting 

E F G 


Lbs (kg) 

00–0 4.20 (106.7) 4.35 (110.5) 3.52 (89.4) 3.50 (88.9) 3.86 (98.0) 4.90 (124.5) 0.54 (13.7) 3.3 (1.5) 

1–2 5.71 (145.0) 5.05 (128.3) 4.44 (112.8) 5.25 (133.4) 3.63 (92.2) 5.80 (147.3) 0.54 (13.7) 7.8 (3.5) 

3 8.70 (221.0) 7.17 (182.1) 5.94 (150.9) 7.00 (177.8) 6.63 (168.4) — — 17.0 (7.7) 

4 14.68 (372.9) 9.11 (231.4) 7.25 (184.2) 13.50 (342.9) 8.50 (215.9) — — 47.0 (21.3) 

5 14.50 (368.3) 12.25 (311.2) 7.78 (197.6) 13.50 (342.9) 11.50 (292.1) — — 63.0 (28.6) 

6 19.77 (502.2) 16.61 (421.9) 9.90 (251.5) 18.00 (457.2) 12.00 (304.8) — — 80.0 (36.3) 

7 28.00 (711.2) 26.75 (679.5) 12.75 (323.9) 12.75 (323.9) 11.00 (279.4) — — 260.0 (118.0) 

8 30.13 (765.3) 39.00 (990.6) 14.69 (373.1) 14.13 (358.9) 15.00 (381.0) — — 350.0 (158.9) 

E 

C 

A 

D 

D 


3/8-16 Screws 

A 

E 

C 


1/4-20 Screws 

D 


1/2-13 Screws 

Open Type—Sizes 7–8 Horizontal 

B 

E 

C 

B 

B 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Three-Phase Non-Reversing and Reversing, Full Voltage Starters 

Contents 

Starters—Three-Phase Non-Reversing and Reversing, Full Voltage 


Features, Benefits and 

Functions 

Non-Reversing 

Three-phase, full voltage 

magnetic starters are most 

commonly used to switch AC 

motor loads. Starters consist 

of a magnetically actuated 

switch (contactor) and an 

overload relay assembled 

together. 

Reversing 

Three-phase, full voltage 

magnetic starters are used 

primarily for reversing of 

three-phase squirrel cage 

motors. They consist of two 

contactors and a single 

overload relay assembled 

together. The contactors are 


interlocked to prevent line 

shorts and energization of 

both contactors 

simultaneously. 

● 

Bimetallic ambient 

compensated overload 

relays—available in three 

basic sizes covering 

applications up to 900 hp— 

reducing number of 

different contactor/overload 

relay combinations that 

have to be stocked 

These overload relays 

feature: 

● Selectable manual 

or automatic reset 

operation 

● Interchangeable heater 

packs adjustable ±24% 

to match motor FLA and 

calibrated for 1.0 and 

1.15 service factors. 

Heater packs for smaller 

overload relay will 

mount in larger overload 

relay—useful in derating 

applications such as 

jogging 

● Load lugs built into 

relay base 

● Single-phase protection, 

Class 20 or Class 10 

trip time 

● Overload trip indication 

● 

Electrically isolated 

NO-NC contacts (pull 

RESET button to test) 

Description 

Page 

Contactors—Non-Reversing and Reversing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 


Reversing, Full Voltage 


Kits and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 

Renewal Parts Publication Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 


Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 



Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 

Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 


Relays—Thermal Overload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 

C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 

● The C440 is a selfpowered, 

robust 

electronic overload 

designed for integrated 

use with Freedom 

NEMA contactors 

● Tiered feature set to 

provide coverage 

specific to your 

application 

● Broad 5:1 FLA range 

for maximum flexibility 

● Coverage from 

0.05–1500A to meet 

all your needs 

● Long life twin break, 

silver cadmium oxide 

contacts—provide 

excellent conductivity 

and superior resistance 

to welding and arc erosion. 

Generously sized for low 

resistance and cool 

operation 

● Designed to 3,000,000 

electrical operations at 

maximum hp ratings up 

through 25 hp at 600V 

● 

Steel mounting plate 

standard on all open 

type starters 

● 

Wired for separate or 

common control 

Non-Reversing 

● Holding circuit contact(s) 

supplied as standard: 

● Sizes 00–3 have a NO 

auxiliary contact block 

mounted on right-hand 

side (on Size 00, contact 

occupies 4th power pole 

position—no increase 

in width) 


NO contact block 

mounted on left side 


2NO/2NC contact 

block on top left 

● Size 8 has a NO/NC 

contact block on top 

left back and a NO on 

top right back 

Reversing 

● Each contactor (Size 00–8) 

supplied with one NO-NC 

side mounted contact 

block as standard. NC 

contacts are wired as 

electrical interlocks 




33.1 


When Ordering Supply 

● 

Catalog number 

● 

Heater pack number (see selection table, Pages 41–43) or full load current 

Size 0 

Non-Reversing Starter 

Size 1 

Reversing Starter 

Magnet Coils—AC or DC 

Starter coils listed in this 

section also have a 50 Hz 

rating as shown in the 

adjacent table. Select 

required starter by catalog 

number and replace the 

magnet coil alpha designation 

Type AN16/AN56 NEMA—Manual or Automatic Reset Overload Relay—Non-Reversing and Reversing 

in the catalog number (_) with 

the proper code suffix from 

the table. 

For Sizes 00–2 and 5–8, the 

magnet coil alpha designation 

will be the next to last digit 

of the listed catalog number. 


coil, change AN16BN0_C 

to AN16BN0LC. For all 





AC Suffix 


120/60 or 110/50 A 380–415/50 L 

240/60 or 220/50 B 550/50 N 

480/60 or 440/50 C 24/60, 24/50 T 

600/60 or 550/50 D 24/50 U 

208/60 E 32/50 V 

277/60 H 48/60 W 

208–240/60 J 48/50 Y 

240/50 K 48/50 Y 

Notes 

 

Starter catalog numbers do not include heater packs. Select one carton of three heater packs. Heater pack selection, Pages 41–43. 

 

Maximum horsepower rating of starters for 380V 50 Hz applications: 


Horsepower 1-1/2 5 10 25 50 75 150 300 600 900 

 

 

 

 

 


Size 

Continuous 

Ampere 

Rating 

(Amperes) 115V 230V 208V 240V 480V 600V Number 

Service-Limit 

Current Rating 

Maximum UL 

Single-Phase 

Horsepower 

Three-Phase 

Three-Pole 

Non-Reversing 

Catalog 




Underscore (_) indicates coil suffix required, see AC Suffix table. 

The service-limit current ratings represent the maximum rms current, in amperes, which the controller shall be permitted to carry for protracted periods in normal service. At service-limit current 

ratings, temperature rises shall be permitted to exceed those obtained by testing the controller at its continuous current rating. The current rating of overload relays or trip current of other motor 

protective devices used shall not exceed the service-limit current rating of the controller. 

Common control. For separate 120V control, insert letter D in 7th position of listed catalog number. Example: AN56VND0CB. 



Three-Pole 

Reversing 

Catalog 

Number 

Vertical 

Reversing 

Catalog 

Number 

00 9 11 1/3 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 AN16AN0_C AN56AN0_C — 

0 18 21 1 2 3 3 5 5 AN16BN0_C AN56BN0_C AN56BNV0_ 

1 27 32 2 3 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 AN16DN0_B AN56DN0_B AN56DNV0_ 

2 45 52 3 7-1/2 10 15 25 25 AN16GN0_B AN56GN0_B AN56GNV0_ 

3 90 104 — — 25 30 50 50 AN16KN0_ AN56KN0_ AN56KNV0_ 

4 135 156 — — 40 50 100 100 AN16NN0_ AN56NN0_ AN56NNV0_ 

5 270 311 — — 75 100 200 200 AN16SN0_B AN56SN0_B — 

6 540 621 — — 150 200 400 400 AN16TN0_C AN56TN0_C — 

7 810 932 — — 200 300 600 600 AN16UN0_B AN56UN0_B — 

8 1215 1400 — — 400 450 900 900 AN16VN0_B AN56VN0_B — 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Two-Speed Selective Control 

When Ordering Supply 

● 

Catalog number plus 

magnet coil code suffix. 

Example: Size 0— 

AN700BN022B 

● 

Heater pack number or full 

load current for each speed 

Two-Winding 

AN700DN022 

One-Winding 

AN700BN0218 

One-Winding 

AN700DN0218 

For two-speed other than 

selective control: 

● 

● 


magnet coil code suffix 

and option required. 

Example: AN700BN022B 

except compelling 

Heater pack number or full 

load current for each speed 

Note: Two-speed starters 

are designed for starting and 

controlling both separate 

(two-winding) and reconnectable 

(one-winding) motors. Separate 

winding, WYE-WYE motors 

have a separate winding for 

each speed. Reconnectable, 

consequent pole motors use the 

same winding for both speeds. 

All standard starters are wired 

for selective control. 

Separate Winding 

Maximum Horsepower—60/50 Hertz 

Constant or Variable Torque 

Constant Horsepower 

NEMA Open Type 

115V 200V 230V 460V/575V 115V 200V 230V 460/575V Size Catalog Number 

1-1/2 3 3 5 1 2 2 3 0 AN700BN022_ 

3 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 2 5 5 7-1/2 1 AN700DN022_ 

— 10 15 25 — 7-1/2 10 20 2 AN700GN022_ 

— 25 30 50 — 20 25 40 3 AN700KN022_ 

— 40 50 100 — 30 40 75 4 AN700NN022_ 

— 75 100 200 — 60 75 150 5 AN700SN022_ 

Prices of starters do not include heater packs. Select two packs (two overload relays, one for each speed). Heater pack selection, Pages 41–43. 

Reconnectable Winding 

Maximum Horsepower—60/50 Hertz 

Open Type 

Constant or Constant 



NEMA Variable Torque Horsepower 

115V 200V 230V 460V/575V 115V 200V 230V 460/575V Size Catalog Number Catalog Number 

1-1/2 3 3 5 1 2 2 3 0 AN700BN0218_ AN700BN0219_ 

3 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 2 5 5 7-1/2 1 AN700DN0218_ AN700DN0219_ 

— 10 15 25 — 7-1/2 10 20 2 AN700GN0218_ AN700GN0219_ 

— 25 30 50 — 20 25 40 3 AN700KN0218_ AN700KN0219_ 

— 40 50 100 — 30 40 75 4 AN700NN0218_ AN700NN0219_ 

Prices of starters do not include heater packs. Select two packs (two overload relays, one for each speed). Heater pack selection, Pages 41–43. 

Magnetic Coils—AC or DC 

Coil Voltage and Hz Code Suffix Coil Voltage and Hz Code Suffix Coil Voltage and Hz Code Suffix 

120/60 or 110/50 A 277/60 H 24/60, 24/50 T 

240/60 or 220/50 B 208–240/60 J 24/50 U 

480/60 or 440/50 C 240/50 K 32/50 V 

600/60 or 550/50 D 380–415/50 L 48/60 W 

208/60 E 550/50 N 48/50 Y 

Notes 

 

If branch circuit protective device is 45A or greater, C320FBR1 fuse kit(s) may be required for circuit protection per NEC 530-072. 

 





33.1 

Kits and Accessories 

● 

Auxiliary contacts, 

contactor mounted— 

Pages 25–27 

● 

Transient suppressor, for 

magnet coil—Page 24 

● 

Timers—solid-state and 

pneumatic, mount on 

contactor—Page 22 


Renewal Parts 

Publication Numbers 

● 

See Page 30 

Wire (75°C) Sizes—AWG or kcmil—NEMA Sizes 00–2—Open and Enclosed 

NEMA Size 

Wire Size Cu Only 

Power Terminals—Line 

00 12–16 AWG stranded, 12–14 AWG solid 

0 8–16 AWG stranded, 10–14 AWG solid 

1 8–14 AWG stranded or solid 

2 3–14 AWG (upper) and/or 6–14 AWG (lower) stranded or solid 

Power Terminals—Load—Cu Only (stranded or solid) 

00–0 14–6 AWG stranded or solid 

1–2 14–2 AWG stranded or solid 

Control Terminals—Cu Only 

12–16 AWG stranded, 12–14 AWG solid 

Wire (75°C) Sizes—AWG or kcmil—NEMA Sizes 3–8—Open and Enclosed 


Wire Size 

Power Terminals—Line and Load 

3 1/0–14 AWG Cu/Al 

4 Open—3/0–8 AWG Cu; Enclosed—250 kcmil—6 AWG Cu/Al 

5 750 kcmil—2 AWG; or (2) 250 kcmil—3/0 AWG Cu/Al 

6 (2) 750 kcmil—3/0 AWG Cu/Al 







00 — 1/2 1/2 1/2 

0 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 

1 3 3 5 5 

2 7-1/2 10 15 15 

3 15 20 30 30 

4 25 30 60 60 

5 60 75 150 150 

6 125 150 300 300 

Notes 

 

Minimum per NEC. Maximum wire size: Sizes 00 and 0 to 8 AWG and Sizes 1–2 to 2 AWG. 

 


 

Maximum horsepower where operation is interrupted more than 5 times per minute, or more than 10 times in a 10 minute period. 

NEMA Standard ICS2-1993 table 2-4-3. 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Wiring Diagrams 

Three-Phase and Single-Phase Applications 

L1 L2 

L3 

A2 

Separate Control 

Remove Wire “c” 

when it is supplied. “c” 

Connect separate 

control lines to the 

No. 1 Terminal on T1 T2 T3 

the remote pilot T1 T2 T3 

device and Terminal 

96 on the overload 

relay. 

Motor 

1 

A1 A2 

L1 L2 L3 

1 

A1 A2 


Remove Wire “c” 

when it is supplied. 

Connect separate 

control lines to the 

No. 1 Terminal on T1 T2 T3 

the remote pilot T1 T2 T3 

device and Terminal 

96 on the overload 

relay. 

Motor 

“c” 

98 

97 

96 

95 

2 

3 

98 

97 

96 

95 

2 

3 

Remote Pilot Devices 

Two-Wire 

Control 1 3 

Not for Use with 

Auto Reset OL Relays 

Three-Wire Start 

Control 

3 

2 

Stop 

1 

When more than 

one pushbutton 

station is used, 

omit Connector 

“A” and connect 

per sketch. 


Start 

Stop 

“A” 

Remote Pilot Devices 

Two-Wire 

Control 1 3 



Three-Wire Start 

Control 

3 

2 

Stop 

1 

When more than 

one pushbutton 


omit Connector 

“A” and connect 

per sketch. 

NEMA Sizes 0, 1 and 2 

Start 

Stop 

“A” 

Start 

Stop 

Start 

Stop 

3 

2 

1 

3 

2 

1 

L1 

T1 

L2 

T2 

Field Conversion 

to Single-Phase, Add 

Dotted Connections 

L1 

T1 

T1 

T2 

Motor 

T2 

Field Conversion 

to Single-Phase, Add 

Dotted Connections 

T1 

L2 

T2 

Motor 




33.1 

NEMA Size 1—BN15DN0AB 

Contents 

Starters—Single-Phase Non-Reversing, Full Voltage, Bi-Metallic Overload 


Single-phase, full voltage 

magnetic starters connect 

the motor directly across the 

line, allowing it to draw full 

inrush current during start-up. 

These starters are most 

commonly used for control of 

self-starting single-phase 

motors up to 15 hp at 230V. 

They consist of a two-pole 

electromagnetic contactor to 

make and break the motor 

power circuit and an overload 

relay to provide running 

overload protection. Starters 

listed in the table include: 

● 

Two-pole Freedom Series 

contactor with long life 

twin break, silver cadmium 

oxide contacts. Generously 

sized for low resistance 

and cool operation. 

Designed to 3 million 

electrical operations 

at maximum hp and 

30 million mechanical 

operations to Size 0, 

10 million operations 

to Size 2 and 6 million 

operations to Size 3 

● 

● 

● 

Three-pole Freedom Series 

overload with poles two 

and three wired in series 

for motor overload 

protection. This overload 

is ambient compensated, 

selectable manual or 

automatic reset, 

interchangeable Class 10 

or 20 heater packs, 1.0 

or 1.15 service factor 

selectability, overload trip 

indication and electrically 

isolated NO-NC contacts 

(pull RESET button to test) 

Holding circuit NO auxiliary 

contact supplied as 

standard. On Size 00, the 

contact occupies the 4th 

power pole position. Sizes 

0–3 have the NO auxiliary 

mounted on the right side 

of the contactor 

Steel mounting plate as 

standard on all open type 

starters. Wired for separate 

or common control 

Description 

Page 

Contactors—Non-Reversing and Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 


Reversing, Full Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 


Full Voltage, Bi-Metallic Overload 


Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 

Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 


Relays—Thermal Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 


33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


When Ordering Specify 

● 


● 

Heater pack number (see selection table, Pages 41–43) or full load current 

BN16DM0AB 

Wiring Diagrams 

Type BN16 NEMA—Manual or Automatic Reset Overload Relay 

NEMA Maximum Horsepower 

Magnet Coil Voltage 

Open Type Two-Pole 

Size 

Motor Voltage Single-Phase (60 Hz) 

Catalog Number 

00 115 1/3 120 BN16AN0AC 

230 1 240 BN16AN0BC 

0 115 1 120 BN16BN0AC 

230 2 240 BN16BN0BC 

1 115 2 120 BN16DN0AB 

230 3 240 BN16DN0BB 

1P 115 3 120 BN16PN0AB 

230 5 240 BN16PN0BB 

2 115 3 120 BN16GN0AB 

230 7-1/2 240 BN16GN0BB 

3 115 7-1/2 120 BN16KN0A 

230 15 240 BN16KN0B 

Starter catalog numbers do not include heater packs. Select one carton of three heater packs. Heater pack selection, Pages 41–43. 

Notes 

 

For separate 120V control circuit. For maximum hp at listed motor voltages, use the rating of other starters of same size. 

Single-Phase Applications (Factory Wired) 

1 

L1 

AC Lines 

3 

L2 

Front View of Panel 

“C” 

T1 T2 

1 

A1 A2 

2/13 

M 

Single-Phase Motor 

3/14 

98 

3/14 

START 

1 3/14 

97 

2/13 

OL 

96 


STOP 


1 

Reset 

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 95 

Two-Wire Control Three-Wire Control 

T1 T2 

2 4 When more than 

one pushbutton START “A” START 



3/14 

Remove Wire “C” if supplied and connect separate control omit Connector “A” 

2/13 

lines to the Number 1 Terminal on the remote pilot device 

and connect per STOP STOP 

and to the Number 96 Terminal on the overload relay. 

sketch at right. 

1 




33.1 

Dimensions 


Non-Reversing Starters, Bi-Metallic Overload—Open Type 

G 



Size 

E 

Aux. 

Wide 

A 

G 

A 

U 

X 

A 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

G 

D 

A Mtg. Holes for (3) 

1/4-20 Screws 

Size 3 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

High 

B 

Deep 

C 

Mounting 

D 

Note 

 

Holding circuit contact for Size 00 occupies 4th power pole position—no increase in width. 

F 

C 

A 

Side 

U Mtd. 

X Aux. 

B 

E 

C L Auxiliary 

Contacts 

Mtg. Holes for #10-32 Screws 

C A C 

Aux. 

Cont. 

E 

B 

A 

E 

D Mtg. Holes for (4) 

3/8-16 Screws 

Size 6 

C 

D 

B 

Size 4 

Mounting 

E F G 


Lbs (kg) 

00–0 1.80 (45.7) 6.60 (167.6) 3.52 (89.4) — 6.07 (154.2) 4.90 (124.5) 0.54 (13.7) 2.2 (1.0) 

1–1P 2.56 (65.0) 7.08 (179.8) 4.44 (112.8) 2.00 (50.8) 6.63 (168.4) 5.80 (147.3) 0.54 (13.7) 4.5 (2.0) 

2 2.56 (65.0) 8.08 (205.2) 4.44 (112.8) 2.00 (50.8) 7.63 (193.8) 5.80 (147.3) 0.54 (13.7) 4.7 (2.1) 

3 4.08 (103.6) 11.35 (288.3) 5.94 (150.9) 3.00 (76.2) 10.81 (274.6) — — 11.0 (5.0) 

4 7.05 (179.1) 12.06 (306.3) 7.25 (184.2) 6.00 (152.4) 8.50 (215.9) — — 23.0 (10.4) 

5 7.00 (177.8) 17.77 (451.4) 7.76 (197.1) 6.00 (152.4) 16.00 (406.4) — — 36.0 (16.3) 

6 9.47 (240.5) 21.69 (550.9) 9.90 (251.5) 3.10 (78.7) 18.00 (457.2) — — 75.0 (34.1) 

7 15.13 (384.3) 29.13 (739.9) 12.64 (321.1) 13.25 (336.6) 21.25 (539.8) — — 120.0 (54.5) 

8 15.13 (384.3) 34.50 (876.3) 15.00 (381.0) 13.25 (336.6) 16.75 (425.5) — — 210.0 (95.3) 

G 

A 

U 

X 

0.13 

(3.3) 

A 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

C L 

D 


1/4-20 Screws 

A 

D 

B 

G 

A 

U 

X 

E 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

Auxiliary 

Contacts 


#10-32 Screws 

Sizes 1–2 

E 

A 

D 

C 


1/2-13 Screws 

Sizes 7–8 

F 

C 

Side 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

E 

C 


1/4-20 Screws 

Size 5 

B 

B 

B 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


Reversing Starters, Bi-Metallic Overload—Open Type 

A 

U 

X 

.13 

(3.3) 

D1 

G 



Size 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

Wide 

A 

C L 

D 

A 

D 

A 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

High 

B 

G 

A 

U 

X 

E 


3/8-16 Screws 

Size 6 

Top 

Mtd. 

Aux. 

Auxiliary 

Contacts 

 

Deep 

C 

F 

C 

Side 

Mtd. 

Aux. 


#10-32 Screws 

Sizes 00 – 2 

E 

E1 

Mounting 

D 

Notes 

 

Includes cross wiring overhang. 

 

See catalog listings for type and location of auxiliary contacts supplied with a particular starter. 

C 

B 

B 


1/4-20 Screws 

Size 3 

Mounting 

E D1 E1 F G 


Lbs (kg) 

00–0 4.20 (106.7) 7.38 (187.5) 3.52 (89.4) 3.50 (88.9) 6.87 (174.5) — — 4.90 (124.5) 0.54 (13.7 3.6 (1.6) 

1 5.71 (145.0) 7.08 (179.8) 4.44 (112.8) 5.25 (133.4) 5.75 (146.1) — — 5.80 (147.3) 0.54 (13.7) 8.3 (3.8) 

2 5.71 (145.0) 8.08 (205.2) 4.44 (112.8) 5.25 (133.4 6.75 (171.5) — — 5.80 (147.3) 0.54 (13.7) 8.5 (3.9) 

3 8.70 (221.0) 11.35 (288.3) 5.94 (150.9) 7.00 (177.8) 10.81 (274.6) — — — — 20.0 (9.1) 

4 14.68 (372.9) 12.06 (306.3) 7.25 (184.2) 13.50 (342.9) 8.50 (215.9) — — — — 49.0 (22.2) 

5 14.50 (368.3) 17.77 (451.4) 7.76 (197.1) 13.50 (342.9) 16.00 (406.4) — — — — 68.0 (30.9) 

6 19.77 (502.2) 22.63 (574.8) 9.90 (251.5) 18.00 (457.2) 12.00 (304.8) 3.10 (78.7) 18.00 (457.2) — — 90.0 (40.9) 

7 28.06 (712.7) 32.13 (816.1) 12.70 (322.6) 12.75 (323.9) 21.25 (539.8) — — — — 175.0 (79.5) 

8 30.38 (771.7) 41.50 (1054.1) 14.70 (373.4) 14.13 (358.9) 16.75 (425.5) — — — — 430.0 (195.2) 

A 

C L 

A 

E 

E 


1/4-20 Screws 

Sizes 4 – 5 

A 

D D 


1/2-13 Screws 

Open Type — Sizes 7 – 8 Horizontal 

E 

C 

C 

C 

B 

B 

B 




33.1 


Reversing Starters—Vertical Construction, Bi-Metallic Overload—AN56V Open Vertical Starter 

F 



Size 

A 

D 

A 

D 

Wide 

A 

High 

B 

Note 

Wire overhang 1.00 mm left, 50 mm right. 

E 


#10-32 Screws 


E 

F 


1/4-20 Screws 


C 

C 

B 

Deep 

C 

B 

Mounting 

Wide 

D 


#10-32 Screws 

NEMA Sizes 1 – 2 

Mounting 

HIgh 

E 

Wire Zone 


Lbs (kg) 

0 4.25 (108.0) 12.05 (306.1) 3.84 (97.5) 2.00 (50.8) 11.50 (292.1) — 4.0 (1.8) 

1 4.25 (108.0) 12.05 (306.1) 3.86 (98.0) 2.00 (50.8) 11.50 (292.1) 1.00 (25.4) 9.0 (4.1) 

2 4.25 (108.0) 12.05 (306.1) 3.86 (98.0) 2.00 (50.8) 11.50 (292.1) 1.00 (25.4) 9.5 (4.3) 

3 9.25 (235.0) 16.75 (425.5) 5.18 (131.6) 7.15 (181.6) 16.07 (408.2) 

21.0 (9.5) 

4 9.08 (230.6) 19.84 (503.9) 5.18 (131.6) 8.00 (203.2) 18.51 (470.2) 1.50 (38.1) 50.0 (22.7) 

F 

F 

D 

A 

A 

D 

F 

F 

E 

E 


1/4-20 Screws 


C 

C 

B 

B 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


Multispeed Starters, Bi-Metallic Overload—AN700 Open Vertical Starter 

F 

 

 

F 



Size 

A 

D 

E 

Wide 

A 

Notes 

 

Mounting holes for (3) #10 screws. 

 

Mounting holes for (3) 1/4-20 screws. 

C 

Size“0” Multispeed Starter 

2-Speed, 2-Winding 

F 

 

 

F 

A 

D 



A 

D 

E 

C 

B 



A 

D 



E 

B 

E 

C 

C 

F 

 

F 

 

High 

B 

 

 

A 

D 

Size“1 – 2” Multispeed Starter 


B 

A 

D 

E 

 

F 

E 

Deep 

C 

Mounting holes for (4) 1/4-20 screws. 

Mounting holes for (4) 5/16 screws. 

C 

A 

D 

B 

E 

Mounting 

Wide 

D 

 

Mounting 

High 

E 

Mounting holes for (4) 3/8 screws. 

Wire 

Zone F 


Lbs (kg) 

Two-Speed—Selective Control—Separate Winding 

0 5.19 (132) 7.38 (188) 3.52 (89) 3.50 (89) 6.87 (175) 0.89 (23) 4.5 (2.0) 

1 5.66 (144) 7.08 (180) 4.42 (112) 5.25 (133) 5.75 (146) 1.23 (31) 9.0 (4.1) 

2 5.66 (144) 8.08 (205) 4.42 (112) 5.25 (133) 6.75 (165) 1.63 (41) 10.0 (4.5) 

3 8.72 (221) 11.35 (288) 5.89 (150) 7.00 (178) 10.81 (275) 1.77 (45) 24.0 (10.9) 

4 14.68 (373) 12.06 (306) 7.25 (184) 13.50 (343) 8.50 (216) 1.95 (50) 53.0 (24.1) 

5 14.50 (368) 17.82 (453) 7.76 (197) 13.50 (343) 16.00 (406) 4.56 (116) 73.0 (33.1) 

Two-Speed—Selective Control—Reconnectable Winding 

0 8.62 (219) 7.06 (179) 3.82 (81) 6.62 (168) 6.50 (165) 0.50 (13) 6.0 (2.7) 

1 8.97 (228) 7.12 (181) 4.72 (120) 6.62 (168) 6.50 (165) 1.04 (26) 10.0 (4.5) 

2 8.90 (226) 8.62 (219) 4.75 (121) 8.40 (213) 8.12 (206) 1.03 (26) 11.0 (5.0) 

3 16.00 (406) 13.46 (342) 6.38 (162) 15.00 (381) 12.25 (311) 1.24 (31) 31.0 (14.1) 

4 15.46 (393) 31.00 (787) 7.74 (197) 13.50 (343) 30.00 (762) 1.84 (47) 72.0 (32.7) 

F 

 

C 



C 



B 

F 

B 

A 

D 

 

F 

E 

 

A 

D 



B 



A 

D 



C 

B 

E 

E 

C 

C 

B 

B 




33.1 

Accessories 

Three-Pole Top Mounted Fuse Block Kit 

IEC Sizes A–K, NEMA Sizes 00–2 

Field mount to Freedom 

Series starters and contactors. 

Designed to save space and 

Mounted Fuse 

Block Kit 

Fuse Block Kits 

Fuse Type 

Class H—30A 250V 

Class R—30A 250V 

Class G—15A 300V 



Class G— 60A 300V 

Class T— 30A 300V 

Class T— 60A 300V 

Class J—30A 600V 

Class J—60A 600V 

Type M—30A 600V 

Class CC—30A 600V 

Class T—30A 600V 

Class T—60A 600V 

Three-Pole Top Mounted Fuse Block Kit 

D 

A 

Mounting 

Plate 

reduce installation costs. They 

provide short circuit protection 

for branch circuits. 


C350KH21 

C350KR21 

C350KG37 

C350KG38 

C350KG31 

C350KG32 

C350KT31 

C350KT32 

C350KJ61 

C350KJ62 

C350KM61 

C350KC63 

C350KT61 

C350KT62 

Fuse Block 


Class Amperes Volts Wide A High B Deep C D 

G 15, 20, 30 300 2.40 (61.0) 3.00 (76.2) 2.04 (51.8) — 

60 

300 2.62 (66.5) 4.25 (108.0) 2.08 (52.8) — 

H 30 250 3.00 (76.2) 3.10 (78.7) 2.23 (56.6) 3.62 (91.9) 

J 30, 60 600 4.81 (122.2) 4.12 (104.6) 2.82 (71.6) — 

M, CC 30 600 2.40 (61.0) 3.00 (76.2) 2.04 (51.8) — 

R 30 250 3.00 (76.2) 3.10 (78.7) 2.23 (56.6) 3.62 (91.9) 

T 30, 60 300 3.44 (87.4) 3.00 (76.2) 2.33 (59.2) — 

30 600 3.75 (95.3) 3.31 (84.1) 2.26 (57.4) — 

60 600 4.87 (123.7) 3.00 (76.2) 2.58 (65.5) — 

C 

B 

Mechanical Interlock and Reversing Kits 

Mechanical interlocks and interlock, stabilizer bar and 

reversing kits are designed a pre-cut, trimmed and 

for field assembly of 

formed wire set. Auxiliary 

reversing contactors or 

contacts, if required, must 

starters from Freedom Series be ordered separately. See 

components. The reversing Pages 25 and 26. 

kits include a mechanical 

C321KM60B 

Part No. 23-7165 

Wire Set 

Mechanical Interlock Only 

Application 


Size 

IEC Size 

Reversing Kits (Horizontal Contactor 

Mounting Only) 

Application 

Notes 

 

Type M fuse block not approved for branch circuit protection. 

 

Without cross-wiring. 

 

For use with latest series product. 

 

Kit includes (2) NC auxiliary contacts. 

Contactor 

Mounting 

Catalog 

Number 

00–2 A–K Horizontal C321KM60B 

3 L–N Horizontal C321KM30 

3 to 4 N to P Horizontal C321KM43 

4 P–S Horizontal C321KM40 

4 to 5 — Horizontal C321KM45 

4 to 6 S to T/U Horizontal C321KM80 

5 — Horizontal C321KM50 

5 to 6 — Horizontal C321KM56 

6 T and U Horizontal C321KM70 

6 to 7 T/U to V–X Horizontal C321KM90 

7 V, W and X Horizontal C321KM34 

4 or 5 to 5 P–S to 5 Vertical C321KM55 

5 to 6 — Vertical C321KM65 

6 T and U Vertical C321KM66 

6 to 7 T/U to V–X Vertical C321KM67 


Size 

Catalog 

Number 

IEC Size 

00 A–C C321KM60K14B 

0 D–F C321KM60K13B 

1 — C321KM60K15B 

2 G–K C321KM60K16B 

3 — C321KM60K17 

— L and M C321KM60K21 

— N C321KM60K18 

4 — C321KM60K19 

5 — C321KM60K20 

— P–S C321KM60K44 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Solid-State Timers 

Solid-State ON DELAY Timer—Side Mounted on Freedom Series 

NEMA 00–2, IEC A–K and C25D, C25E and C25F Frame 

This timer is designed to be ON DELAY timing function 

wired in series with the starts. At the completion of 

load (typically a coil). When the set timing period, timer 

the START button is pushed and series wired load will 

(power applied to timer), the both be energized. 

Solid-State Timer 

Shorting Bar Kits 

These kits provide phase-tophase 

power connections of 

contactors for field assembly. 

The kits include bus 

Mounted Timer Product Selection 

Catalog 

Timing Range 

Number 

0.1–1.0 seconds C320TDN1_ 

1–30 seconds C320TDN30_ 

30–300 seconds C320TDN300_ 

5–30 minutes C320TDN3000_ 

Shorting Bar Kits 

Description 

NEMA Size 3, IEC Sizes L–N 

NEMA Size 4, IEC Sizes A–S 

NEMA Size 6, IEC Sizes T and U 

connections and mounting 

hardware. The shorting bars 

connect all three phases of a 

single contactor. 

Catalog 

Number 

C321SB18 

C321SB19 

C321SB22 

Pneumatic Timers—Top Mounted 

Attachment mounts on top of unit has 1NO-1NC isolated 

any NEMA Size 00–2 or IEC timed contacts—circuits in 

Size A–K Freedom Series each pole must be the same 

starter or contactor (top polarity. Units are convertible 

mounted auxiliary contacts from OFF to ON DELAY or 

cannot be installed on device vice-versa. 

when timer is used). Timer 

Pneumatic Timers 

Pneumatic Timers 

Timing Range 

Maximum Ampere Ratings 

Vac 

Description 

120 240 480 600 

Locking Cover for Overload Relay—C306 Only 

Snap-on transparent or 

dial—helps prevent 

opaque plastic panel for accidental or unauthorized 

covering access port to the changes to trip and reset 

overload relay trip setting setting. 

Locking Cover for Overlay Relay 

Min. Ordering 

Description 

Quantity (Std. Pkg.) 

Notes 

 

Add operating voltage suffix to catalog number. 

A = 120V, B = 240V, E = 208V 

Rated 0.5 ampere pilot duty—not to be used on larger contactors. 

Terminal connections are quick connects only. Two per side. 

Catalog 

Number 

0.1 to 30 seconds C320TP1 

10 to 180 seconds C320TP2 

Make 30 15 7.5 6 

Break 3 1.5 0.75 0.6 

Locking Cover for 

Overlay Relay 

Catalog 

Number 

Clear cover, no 

50 C320PC3 

accessibility 

Gray cover, no 

50 C320PC4 

accessibility, with 

Auto only nib 

Gray cover, no 

50 C320PC5 

accessibility, with 

Manual only nib 

Gray cover with FLA dial 50 C320PC6 

accessibility, A, B, C, D 

positions and Auto only nib 

Gray cover with FLA dial 

accessibility, A, B, C, D 

positions and Manual 

only nib 

50 C320PC7 




33.1 

Identification Markers 

IEC Sizes A–K, NEMA Sizes 00–2 

Designed to snap on the face 

of contactor for easy, 

personalized identification of 

Control Circuit Fuse Block 

These panel mounted 

fuse holders, designed for 

control circuit protection or 

other similar low current 

requirements, have extractor 

type fuse caps. The Class CC 

rejection type fuses (KTK-R) 

used in these holders are 

intended for use with 

Control Circuit 

Fuse Block 

Identification Markers 

Description 

Identification marker 

individual devices. Includes 

holder and labels. 

equipment designated as 

being suitable for use on 

systems having high available 

fault currents. If branch 

circuit protective device is 

45A or greater, C320FBR 

fuse kit may be required for 

control circuit protection per 

NEC 430-72. 

Control Circuit Fuse Block 

Type Max. Amperes Catalog Number 

Dimensions 


Fuse 

1.88 (47.8) 

1.25 (31.8) 

0.97 

(24.6) 


C320DL2 

Fuse holder only 15 C320FB 

0.88 1.19 

(22.4) (30.2) 

2.06 

(52.3) 

30 C320FBR 

DIN Rail Mounting Channel—35 mm 

Designed for DIN rail 

mounting of IEC style 

contactors and starters. 

DIN Rail 

Finger Protection Shields 

Snap-on shields for both 

contactors and starters 

provide IEC Type IP20 finger 

Adapter to DIN Rail Mount 

NEMA 1–2 and IEC G–K Contactors 

Designed to allow DIN rail 

mounting of NEMA 1–2 and 

IEC G–K contactors. Includes 

all hardware required to 

DIN Rail 

Description 


1 meter length MC382MA1 

protection. Prevents 

accidental contact with 

line/load terminals. 

Finger Protection Shields 

Application 

NEMA Size 00, IEC Sizes A–C 

NEMA Size 0, IEC Sizes D–F 

NEMA Sizes 1–2, IEC Sizes G–K 

Contactors 

Reversing contactors 


Starters 

Reversing starters 

NEMA Size 2, IEC Sizes G–K 

Starters 

Reversing starters 

Adapter to DIN Rail Mount 


C320DN65 

convert contactors from 

panel mounting to 35 mm 

DIN rail mounting. 

Notes 

 

A fuse is not supplied, but holder will accept a Bussman Type KTK or KTK-R 

(13/32 in x 1-1/2 in) fuse, 600V maximum. 

Includes a 5A, 600V KTK-R fuse. 


C320LS1 

C320LS2 

C320LS3 

C320LS4 

C320LS5 

C320LS6 

C320LS7 

C320LS8 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Transient Suppressor Kits 

NEMA Sizes 00–2, IEC Sizes A–K 

These kits limit high voltage 

transients produced in the 

control circuit when power is 

removed from the contactor 

or starter coil. There are three 

separate suppressors for use 

on 24–120V, 208–240V or 

277–480V coils respectively. 

C320TS2 

NEMA Sizes 3–5, IEC Sizes L–S 

This device mounts on top 

of any side mounted auxiliary 

contact on Freedom Series 

NEMA Sizes 3–5, IEC Sizes 

L–S and lighting contactors 

100–300A. It connects across 

coil terminals on any 120V 

contactor or starter magnet 

C320AS1 

Add-On Power Pole Kit 

NEMA Sizes 00–2, IEC A–K 

This device mounts on the 

side of Freedom NEMA Size 

00–2 and IEC Size A–K 

contactors. One unit can be 

mounted on each side and 

These devices mount directly 

to the coil terminals of 

Freedom Series contactors 

or starters NEMA Sizes 00–2, 

IEC Sizes A–K and lighting 

contactors 10–60A. 

Reversing devices will 

require two. 


Description 

Coil 

Voltage 

coil (reversing starters or 

contactors require 2). 

Limits high voltage 

transients produced in 

the circuit when power is 

removed from the coil. 


Catalog 

Number 

Transient suppressor 24/120V C320TS1 

208/240V C320TS2 

277/480V C320TS3 

Description 

Coil 

Voltage 

Catalog 

Number 

Transient suppressor 120V C320AS1 

carries UL, cUL and IEC 

ratings. The device is rated 

for resistive, inductive and 

lighting applications. 

NEMA Sizes 00–2, IEC A–K 

UL Ampere Rating 

Horsepower Single-Phase 

Inductive Resistive 

600V 600V 115V 

230V 

Note 

 

Suppressor is compatible with coil voltages/ranges as shown, both 50 and 60 Hz. 

Locked 

Rotor 

240V 

Adhesive Dust Cover 


These adhesive stickers 

come 25 to a package and 

provide extra protection from 

contaminants when applied 

to the sides of Freedom 

NEMA Sizes 00–2 and IEC 

Lighting Ballast 

Tungsten 

480V 

IEC 947 Ampere Rating 

AC-1 

600V 

AC-3 

600V 

Sizes A–K. Adhesive covers 

are easily applied to side 

opening where auxiliaries 

are not installed and provide 

extra protection from metal 

filings and other debris. 


Description 


25 to a package C320DSTCVR 

AC-5a 

AC-5b 

480V 

1NO Power Pole 

Catalog 

Number 

15 20 1/2 2 96 20 20 12 18 C320PPD10 




33.1 

Auxiliary Contacts 

Contact Configuration Code 

This two-digit code is found 

on the auxiliary contact to 

assist in identifying the 

specific contact 

configuration. The first digit 

indicates the quantity of 

NO contacts and the second 

indicates the quantity of 

NC contacts. 

Side Mounted 

Top Mounted 

NEMA Sizes 00–2—IEC Sizes A–K 

The auxiliary contacts listed 

on this page are designed 

for installation on Freedom 

Series starters and 

contactors. Snap-on 

design facilitates quick, 

easy installation. 

NEMA Sizes 00–2—IEC Sizes A–K 

Description 

Contact 

Configuration Code 

These bifurcated design 

contact blocks, featuring 

silver cadmium alloy 

contacts, are well suited 

for use in very low energy 

(logic level) circuits. 


Side Mounted 

1NO 10 C320KGS1 

1NC 01 C320KGS2 

1NO-1NC 11 C320KGS3 

2NO 20 C320KGS4 

2NC 02 C320KGS5 

1NO-1NCI N/A C320KGS6 

1NO (EC)-1NC (LO) N/A C320KGS7 

1NCI N/A C320KGS8 

Top Mounted 

1NO 10 C320KGT1 

1NC 01 C320KGT2 

1NO-1NC 11 C320KGT3 

2NO 20 C320KGT4 

2NC 02 C320KGT5 

1NO-1NCI N/A C320KGT6 

1NO (EC)-1NC (LO) N/A C320KGT7 

1NCI N/A C320KGT8 

3NO 30 C320KGT9 

2NO-1NC 21 C320KGT10 

1NO-2NC 12 C320KGT11 

3NC 03 C320KGT12 

4NO 40 C320KGT13 

3NO-1NC 31 C320KGT14 

2NO-2NC 22 C320KGT15 

1NO-3NC 13 C320KGT16 

4NC 04 C320KGT17 

3NO-1NCI N/A C320KGT18 

2NO-1NCI-1NC N/A C320KGT19 

2NO-1NO (EC)-1NC (LO) N/A C320KGT20 

1NO-1NC-1NO (EC)-1NC (LO) N/A C320KGT21 

Notes 

 

NCI = Normally Closed early opening designed for use in reversing applications. EC = Early Closing. LO = Late Opening. 

 

For reference only—not part of catalog number. 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

NEMA Sizes 3–8—IEC Sizes L–Z 

C320KGS42 

C320KGS22 

Base Auxiliary Contacts— 


Circuit 


Contact IEC Sizes L –N 

Configuration Catalog 

Code Number 

NEMA Sizes 4–5 

IEC Sizes P–S 

Catalog 

Number 

NO 10 C320KGS31 C320KGS41 

NO-NC 11 C320KGS32 C320KGS42 

Auxiliary Contacts—NEMA Sizes 3–5, 

IEC Sizes L–S 

Circuit 

Contact 

Configuration Code 

Catalog 

Number 

NO 10 C320KGS20 

NC 01 C320KGS21 

NO-NC 11 C320KGS22 

Sealed Logic Level 

NO 10 C320KGS20L 

NC 01 C320KGS21L 

NO-NC 11 C320KGS22L 

Auxiliary Contacts—NEMA Sizes 6–8, 

IEC Sizes T–Z 

Circuit 

Contact 

Configuration 

Code 

Size 

Catalog 

Number 

NO-NC 11 NEMA 8, IEC Z C320KA5 

2NO-2NC 22 NEMA 6–7 C320KA6 

2NO-2NC 22 IEC T–X C320KA8 

Auxiliary Contact Ratings (Amperes) 

Ratings—NEMA A600 

AC Volts 

Current 

120V 240V 480V 600V 

Make and interrupting 60 30 15 12 

Break 6 3 1.5 1 

Continuous 10 10 10 10 

Ratings—NEMA P300 

Continuous Thermal Rating: 5A 

DC Volts 

Make/Break Amperes 

125 1.10 

250 0.55 

Ratings—Logic Level 

Minimum Ratings for Logic Level and Hostile Atmosphere Application 

Minimum Amperes 

20 mA 

Minimum Volts 

24 Vac/Vdc 

Ratings C320KGS20L, C320KGS21L, C320KGS22L 

DC-12 

AC-12 

U e I e U e I e 

80 0.1 250 0.1 

Notes 

 

For reference only—not part of catalog number. 

 

NO-NC occupies two position—L2 and L3, or R2 and R3. See figure on Page 27. 

 

Form C contacts. 




33.1 

Auxiliary Contact Location 


The sketches below illustrate 

the maximum number of 

auxiliary contacts that can be 

Auxiliary Contacts 

Size 

Poles 


Available Mounting Positions 

Open Type 

Enclosed 

assembled to a contactor or 

starter and their locations. 

Catalog 

Number 

A–K 3 T1, L1 L1 AE16 

00 3 T1, L1, R1 L1 AN16 

0–2 3 T1, L1 L1 

A–K 3 L1, R1 L1, R1 AE56 

00–2 3 T1, T2 — AN56 

A–C 2–4 T1, L1, R1 L1, R1 CE15 

D–K 3 T1, L1 L1 

G–J 4 T1, R1 — 

G–J 5 T1 — 

00 2–4 T1, L1, R1 L1 CN15 

0–2 2–3 T1, L1 L1 

1, 2 4 T1, L1 — 

1, 2 5 T1, L1 — 

10A 2–4 T1, L1, R1 L1 CN35 

20–60A 2–3 T1, L1 L1 

60A 4 T1, L1 — 

60A 5 T1, L1 — 

A–K 3 L1, R1 L1, R1 CE55 

00–2 3 T1, T2 — CN55 

L1 

T1 

Top View 

L1 T1 R1 

Front View 

R1 

Non-Reversing 

Contactors and Starters 

L1 

T1 

Top View 

T2 

R1 

L1 T1 T2 R1 

Front View 

Reversing 


NEMA Sizes 3–8, IEC Sizes L–Z 

The sketches below illustrate 

the maximum number of 

auxiliary contacts that can be 

assembled to a contactor and 

their locations. 

Mounting Positions 

Size 

NEMA Size 3, IEC Sizes L–N 

NEMA Sizes 4–5, IEC Sizes P–S 

NEMA Sizes 6–7, IEC Sizes T–X 

NEMA Size 8, IEC Size Z 


Rear 

L1 

Base 

Aux. 

Cont. 

L2 

Aux. 

Cont. 

Left Side 

of Contactor 

L3 

Aux. 

Cont. 


IEC Sizes L–S 

L1 

Note: A base auxiliary contact 

must be added in position R1 

before additional auxiliary 

contacts can be mounted on 

NEMA Size 3 and IEC Sizes L–N, 

or in L1 on NEMA Sizes 4–5 and 

IEC Sizes P–S. 

Available Mounting Positions 

R2, R3, L1, L2, L3 

L2, L3, R1, R2, R3 

R1 

L2, R2 


IEC Sizes T, U, V, W and X 

L1 

L2 

Front 

of Contactor 


IEC Size Z 

Notes 

Available positions on contactors or starters other than what is factory installed. 

When a pneumatic timer is mounted on contactor, only side mounted auxiliary contact 

positions are available. The solid-state timer, when added, takes up side mounted auxiliary 

contact position. 

R1 

R3 

Aux. 

Cont. 

R1 

R2 

R2 

Aux. 

Cont. 

R1 

Base 

Aux. 

Cont. 

Right Side 

of Contactor 

Rear 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

DC Magnet Coils 


Conversion Kit for 

Field Assembly 

● 


Factory Installed DC Coil 

● 

For factory installed DC 

magnet coil on AC 

contactors or noncombination 

starters (open 

type only), substitute the 

code suffix from the table 

on this page for the 

magnet coil identifier in 

the device catalog number. 

EXAMPLE: For Size 0 AC 

contactor with a 24 Vdc 

coil, change AN16BN0AC 

to AN16BN0T1C 

Application 

● Connect for separate 

control 

● Not for use with cover 

control switch operators 

● Use twin break, heavyduty 

pilot devices 

● Designed for +10%, –20% 

rated voltage, continuous 

duty operation 

Non-Reversing Kit Consists of: 

● One encapsulated DC 

magnet coil 

● One NCI or NO/NCI side 

mounted auxiliary contact 

Note: These kits are supplied 

with a NO/NCI side mounted 

auxiliary contact in place of the 

NCI contact. 

● 

● 

Two blue colored 

connection wires 

One instruction publication 

Operation 

See next page for operation 

details. 

DC Magnet Coils 

Contactor or 

Conversion Data 

Starter Size 

Magnet Coil 

Coil 

NEMA IEC Volts Number 

Amps 

P.U./Seal 

Watts 

P.U./Seal 

NCI 

Interlock 

Complete Conversion Kit 

Catalog 

Number 

Ship Wt. 

Lbs (kg) 

Factory 

Installed 

Code 

Suffix 

Non-Reversing—Kit Includes NCI Side Mounted Auxiliary Contact 

00 and 0 A–F 12 9-2988-11 6.4/0.28 76.8/3.36 C320KGD1 C335KD3R1 1.0 (0.5) R1 

CN35–A, B, D 

D15 Relays 

24 9-2988-12 3.2/0.14 76.8/3.36 C320KGD1 C335KD3T1 T1 

48 9-2988-13 1.6/0.07 76.8/3.36 C320KGD1 C335KD3W1 W1 

120 9-2988-14 0.64/0.028 76.8/3.36 C320KGD1 C335KD3A1 A1 

 

A–F 12 9-2988-11 6.4/0.28 76.8/3.36 C320KGD2 C335KD3R4 1.0 (0.5) R4 

00 and 0 

CN35–A, B, D 

24 9-2988-12 3.2/0.14 76.8/3.36 C320KGD2 C335KD3T4 T4 

D15 Relays 

48 9-2988-13 1.6/0.07 76.8/3.36 C320KGD2 C335KD3W4 W4 

120 9-2988-14 0.64/0.028 76.8/3.36 C320KGD2 C335KD3A4 A4 

1 and 2 G–K 12 9-2990-1 15.4/0.42 185/4.98 C320KGD5 C335KD4R4 1.0 (0.5) R4 

CN35–G 

24 9-2990-2 7.7/0.021 185/4.96 C320KGD5 C335KD4T4 T4 

48 9-2990-3 3.9/0.11 185/5.04 C320KGD5 C335KD4W4 W4 

120 9-2990-4 1.5/0.041 185/4.87 C320KGD5 C335KD4A4 A4 

3 

L–N 12 9-3002-1 24/0.40 293/4.84 C320KGD3 C335KD5R1 2.0 (0.9) R1 

CN35–K 

24 9-3002-2 12/0.20 288/4.75 C320KGD3 C335KD5T1 T1 

48 9-3002-3 6.1/0.097 295/4.67 C320KGD3 C335KD5W1 W1 

120 9-3002-4 2.5/0.038 298/4.57 C320KGD3 C335KD5A1 A1 

4 and 5 P–S 24 9-2026-4 18/0.22 400/5.3 C320KGD3 C335KA3T1 2.5 (1.1) T1B 

CN35–N, S 

48 9-2026-3 9/0.11 400/5.2 C320KGD3 C335KA3W1 W1B 

120 9-2026-2 3.3/0.05 450/5.4 C320KGD3 C335KA3A1 A1B 

240 9-2026-1 1.7/0.02 440/4.9 C320KGD3 C335KA3B1 B1B 

Reversing 

00 and 0 A–F 12 (2) 9-2988-1 6.4/0.28 76.8/3.36 (2) C320KGD1 C335RD3R1 1.0 (0.5) R1 

CN35–A, B, D 

D15 relays 

24 (2) 9-2988-2 3.2/0.14 76.8/3.36 (2) C320KGD1 C335RD3T1 T1 

48 (2) 9-2988-3 1.6/0.07 76.8/3.36 (2) C320KGD1 C335RD3W1 W1 

1 and 2 

CN35–G 

120 (2) 9-2988-4 0.64/0.028 76.8/3.36 (2) C320KGD1 C335RD3A1 A1 

G–K 12 (2) 9-2990-1 15.4/0.42 185/4.98 (2) C320KGD3 

 

— R1 

24 (2) 9-2990-2 7.7/0.21 185/4.96 (2) C320KGD3 

 

T1 

48 (2) 9-2990-3 3.9/0.11 185/5.04 (2) C320KGD3 

 

W1 

120 (2) 9-2990-4 1.5/0.041 185/4.87 (2) C320KGD3 

 

A1 

Notes 

These kits are supplied with a NO/NCI side mounted auxiliary contact in place of the NCI contact. 

Kit does not include mechanical interlock or crossover wiring. Two NO/NCI top mounted auxiliary contacts are supplied for electrical interlocking. 

Factory installed DC coils on NEMA contactors and starters include a NO/NC top mounted auxiliary contact on each contactor for electrical 

interlocking. On IEC contactors and starters, a NC top mounted auxiliary contact is supplied on each contactor for electrical interlocking. 

Available factory assembled only. 




33.1 

Operation 

These DC coil kits have 

separate pick-up and seal 

windings. A special (side 

mounted) early-break NCI 

auxiliary contact is used to 

either disconnect the pick-up 

winding or insert the seal 

winding in series with the 

pick-up winding, depending 

on the frame size of the 

contactor. DC coil kits come 

in two styles, a suffix 1 and a 

suffix 4. Suffix 1 contains only 

the special (side mounted) 

early break NCI auxiliary 

contact. Suffix 4 contains 

a NO contact in the same 

package as the special 

(side mounted) early-break 

NCI auxiliary contact. 

Note: For NEMA Sizes 00 and 0 

and IEC Sizes A–F, contactors 

Elementary Diagrams 

A1 

2 

NCI 

NO 

A2 

Important 

Incoming DC must be connected 

between A1 and Top A2 Terminal. 

A1 

A2 Top 

Hold 

Hold 

Pick-Up 

3 

3 

 

NO 

 

Pick-Up 

DC Coil Elementary Diagram 

for NEMA Sizes 1–3 and IEC Sizes G–N 


2 

3 

A2 Bottom 

NCI 

DC Coil Elementary Diagram 

for NEMA Sizes 00, 0, 4 and 5 

and IEC Sizes A–F and P–S 


may utilize either suffix 1 or 4 DC 

coil kits; starters may utilize suffix 

4 DC coil kits only. For NEMA 

Sizes 1 and 2 and IEC Sizes G–K, 

both contactors and starters may 

utilize a suffix 4 DC coil kit only. 

On the above sizes only, 

when the special auxiliary 

package is mounted on the 

side of a contactor or starter, 

no standard auxiliary contact 

may be mounted on the 

same side. 

Note: For NEMA Sizes 3–5 and 

IEC Sizes L–S, special coil NCI 

clearing contact is an add-on 

auxiliary (must mount on a base 

mount auxiliary contact; normally 

a 1NO). This arrangement will 

normally account for two of the 

three contact positions on the 

side of each contactor or starter. 

Auxiliary 

Contact 

Competitive Mounting Plates 

The C321 adapter plates 

permit direct replacement of 

competitive starters with 

Freedom Series starters 

without drilling and tapping 

new mounting holes. Allen- 

Bradley 509, Eaton’s A10 

C321CMP1 

(adapter plate not required for 

replacing A10 Starter Sizes 1, 

4 and 5), Furnas 14, ESP100, 

General Electric CR206, 

CR306, Siemens SXL, 

Square D 8536, 

Westinghouse A200, B200. 

Competitive Mounting Plates 

Freedom 

Index Number 



00, 0 C321CMP0 

1 C321CMP1 

2 C321CMP2 

3 C321CMP3 

4 C321CMP4 

5 C321CMP5 

Note 

 

1NO available in Suffix 4 kits only. 

 

Handling number only—does not appear on product. The handling number is stamped 

on the carton label only. 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Special Modifications 

For Catalog Numbers AN16, AN56, CE15, CN15, CN35, CN55 

Starter Size —NEMA 

Addition or Special Feature 

00 0 1/— 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

Control Circuit 

Extra auxiliary circuit, factory installed NO or NC—each contact 

Consult sales office for pricing adders. 

Transient suppressor 

Consult sales office for pricing adders. 

Power Circuit 

Contactor/starter for ring lug capability—add Mod Code T16 to catalog number Consult sales office for pricing adders. 

(Power terminals only, control terminals as standard) 

Standalone overload relays can not accept ring lugs on line side 

Factory Installed Dust Covers 

Factory installed C320DSTCVR—add Mod Code -53 to catalog number NA NA NA NA NA NA 

Renewal Parts 

For a complete listing of parts, refer to the Renewal Parts Publication Number referenced below. 

For Catalog Numbers AN16, AN30, AN40, AN56, AN70, AN80, AN800, CN15, 

CN35 and CN55 Contactors and Starters (Size 00, 0) 

NEMA Size 00 NEMA Size 0 

Series B1 Series C1 Series B1 Series C1 

Description 

Part No. Part No. Part No. Part No. 

Renewal Parts Publication Number 22177 22177 22177 22177 

Contact Kits 

Two-pole 

Three-pole 

 

Four-pole 

 

Five-pole 

 

Magnet Coils 

Coil Suffix 

120V 60 Hz or 110V 50 Hz A 9-2875-1 9-2875-1 9-2876-1 9-2876-1 

240V 60 Hz or 220V 50 Hz B 9-2875-2 9-2875-2 9-2876-2 9-2876-2 

480V 60 Hz or 440V 50 Hz C 9-2875-3 9-2875-3 9-2876-3 9-2876-3 

600V 60 Hz or 550V 50 Hz D 9-2875-4 9-2875-4 9-2876-4 9-2876-4 

208V 60 Hz E 9-2875-5 9-2875-5 9-2876-5 9-2876-5 

277V 60 Hz H 9-2875-12 9-2875-12 9-2876-12 9-2876-12 

208/240V 60 Hz J 9-2875-37 9-2875-37 9-2876-17 9-2876-17 

240V 50 Hz K 9-2875-11 9-2875-11 9-2876-11 9-2876-11 

380–415V 50 Hz L 9-2875-6 9-2875-6 9-2876-6 9-2876-6 

380V 50 Hz L — — — — 

415V 50 Hz M — — — — 

550V 50 Hz N — — — — 

24V 60 Hz–24V 50 Hz T 9-2875-36 9-2875-36 9-2876-36 9-2876-36 

24V 60 Hz T — — — — 

24V 50 Hz U 9-2875-36 9-2875-36 9-2876-36 9-2876-36 

32V 50 Hz V 9-2875-16 9-2875-16 9-2876-16 9-2876-16 

48V 60 Hz W 9-2875-8 9-2875-8 9-2876-8 9-2876-8 

48V 50 Hz Y 9-2875-9 9-2875-9 9-2876-9 9-2876-9 

Magnet Frame Armature 

Lower magnet frame 

Upper magnet frame 

 

Notes 

 

These modifications are generally available in kit form at lower cost. See specific product sections for kit listings. 

 

CN35A = Size 00, CN35B and CN35D = Size 0, CN35G = Size 2, CN35K = Size 3, CN35N = Size 4, and CN35S = Size 5. 

 

Replace with complete contactor. 




33.1 

For Catalog Numbers AN16, AN30, AN40, AN56, AN70, AN80, AN800, CN15, CN35 

and CN55 Contactors and Starters (Size 1, 2) 


Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1 NEMA Size 3 

Description 

Part No. Part No. Part No. Part No. Part No. 

Renewal Parts Publication Number 20861 22177 20861 22177 20426 

Contact Kits 

Two-pole 6-65 6-65 6-65-7 6-65-7 6-43-5 

Three-pole 6-65-2 6-65-2 6-65-8 6-65-8 6-43-6 

Four-pole 6-65-9 6-65-9 6-65-15 6-65-15 — 

Five-pole 6-65-10 6-65-10 6-65-16 6-65-16 — 

Magnet Coils 

Coil Suffix 

120V 60 Hz or 110V 50 Hz A 9-3285-1 9-3285-1 9-3285-1 9-3285-1 9-2756-1 KIT 

240V 60 Hz or 220V 50 Hz B 9-3285-2 9-3285-2 9-3285-2 9-3285-2 9-2756-2 KIT 

480V 60 Hz or 440V 50 Hz C 9-3285-3 9-3285-3 9-3285-3 9-3285-3 9-2756-3 KIT 

600V 60 Hz or 550V 50 Hz D 9-3285-4 9-3285-4 9-3285-4 9-3285-4 9-2756-4 KIT 

208V 60 Hz E 9-3285-9 9-3285-9 9-3285-9 9-3285-9 9-2756-5 KIT 

277V 60 Hz H 9-3285-7 9-3285-7 9-3285-7 9-3285-7 9-2756-9 KIT 

208/240V 60 Hz J — — — — — 

240V 50 Hz K 9-3285-14 9-3285-14 9-3285-14 9-3285-14 9-2756-13 KIT 

380–415V 50 Hz L 9-3285-8 9-3285-8 9-3285-8 9-3285-8 — 

380V 50 Hz L — — — — 9-2756-12 KIT 

415V 50 Hz M — — — — 9-2756-8 KIT 

550V 50 Hz N — — — — 9-2756-14 KIT 

24V 60 Hz–24V 50 Hz T — — — — — 

24V 60 Hz T 9-3285-6 9-3285-6 9-3285-6 9-3285-6 9-2756-6 KIT 

24V 50 Hz U 9-3285-12 9-3285-12 9-3285-12 9-3285-12 9-2756-11 KIT 

32V 50 Hz V 9-3285-10 9-3285-10 9-3285-10 9-3285-10 9-2756-10 KIT 

48V 60 Hz W 9-3285-11 9-3285-11 9-3285-11 9-3285-11 9-2756-15 KIT 

48V 50 Hz Y 9-3285-13 9-3285-13 9-3285-13 9-3285-13 9-2756-7 KIT 

Magnet Frame Armature 

Lower magnet frame 17-18200 17-18200 17-18200 17-18200 17-8955-2 KIT 

Upper magnet frame 48-1936 48-1936 48-1936 48-1936 48-1902 KIT 

Note 

 


33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


For Catalog Numbers AN16, AN30, AN40, AN56, AN70, AN80, AN800, CN15, CN35 and CN55 

Contactors and Starters (Size 4, 5, 6) 

NEMA Size 4 NEMA Size 5 NEMA Size 6 

Contactor and Starter Contactor and Starter 

Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1 Series A1, Starter Series B1 Series B1, Starter Series C1 

Description 

Part No. Part No. Part No. Part No. Part No. Part No. 

Renewal Parts Publication Number 20428 20428 20429 20429 20146 23349 

Contact Kits 

Two-pole 6-44 6-26 6-45 6-45 6-601-2 — 

Three-pole 6-44-2 6-26-2 6-45-2 6-45-2 6-601 6-648 

Magnet Coils 

Coil Suffix 

120V 60 Hz or 110V 50 Hz A 9-1891-1 KIT 9-1891-1 KIT 9-1891-1 KIT 9-1891-1 KIT 9-2698 9-3006 

240V 60 Hz or 220V 50 Hz B 9-1891-2 KIT 9-1891-2 KIT 9-1891-2 KIT 9-1891-2 KIT 9-2698-2 9-3006-2 

480V 60 Hz or 440V 50 Hz C 9-1891-3 KIT 9-1891-3 KIT 9-1891-3 KIT 9-1891-3 KIT 9-2698-3 9-3006-3 

600V 60 Hz or 550V 50 Hz D 9-1891-4 KIT 9-1891-4 KIT 9-1891-4 KIT 9-1891-4 KIT 9-2698-4 9-3006-4 

208V 60 Hz E 9-1891-13 KIT 9-1891-13 KIT 9-1891-13 KIT 9-1891-13 KIT 9-2698-5 — 

277V 60 Hz H 9-1891-26 KIT 9-1891-26 KIT 9-1891-26 KIT 9-1891-26 KIT — — 

208/240V 60 Hz J — — — — — — 

240V 50 Hz K 9-1891-20 KIT 9-1891-20 KIT 9-1891-20 KIT 9-1891-20 KIT — — 

380–415V 50 Hz L — — — — 9-2698-6 9-3006-7 

380V 50 Hz L 9-1891-14 KIT 9-1891-14 KIT 9-1891-14 KIT 9-1891-14 KIT — — 

415V 50 Hz M 9-1891-21 KIT 9-1891-21 KIT 9-1891-21 KIT 9-1891-21 KIT — — 

550V 50 Hz N 9-1891-8 KIT 9-1891-8 KIT 9-1891-8 KIT 9-1891-8 KIT — — 

24V 60 Hz–24V 50 Hz T — — — — — 9-3006-8 

24V 60 Hz T 9-1891-15 KIT 9-1891-15 KIT 9-1891-15 KIT 9-1891-15 KIT — — 

24V 50 Hz U 9-1891-16 KIT 9-1891-16 KIT 9-1891-16 KIT 9-1891-16 KIT — — 

48V 60 Hz W — — — — 9-2698-8 9-3006-9 

48V 50 Hz Y 9-1891-18 KIT 9-1891-18 KIT 9-1891-18 KIT 9-1891-18 KIT — — 

Overload Relays 

For replacement on existing starters three-pole— 10-6530-4 10-6530-4 C306DN3B C306DN3B C306DN3B C306DN3B 

ambient compensated bimetallic 

Current Transformer — — 42-3564 42-3564 42-3598 42-3598 

Magnet Frame Armature 

Lower Magnet Frame 48-1030-2 48-1030-2 48-1030-2 48-1030-2 — — 

Upper Magnet Frame 48-1029-4 48-1029-4 48-1029-4 48-1029-4 — — 

Feeder Group Renewal 

Volts 

Hertz 

NEMA Size 4 NEMA Size 5 NEMA Size 6 

Contactor and Starter 

Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1 Series A1, Starter Series B1 

110–120 50/60 — — — — 9-2705 9-3007 

220–240 50/60 — — — — 9-2705-2 9-3007-2 

440–480 50/60 — — — — 9-2705-3 9-3007-3 

550–600 50/60 — — — — 9-2705-4 9-3007-4 

208 50/60 — — — — 9-2705-5 9-3007-5 

380–415 50/60 — — — — 9-2705-6 9-3007-8 

48–52 50/60 — — — — 9-2705-8 9-3007-6 

Notes 

 


 

Consult factory. 

 

Voltage ratings of the main coils must match those of the feeder group for proper operation of the starter/contactor. 

Contactor and Starter 

Series B1, Starter Series C1 




33.1 


For Catalog Numbers AN16, AN30, AN40, AN56, AN70, AN80, AN800, CN15, CN35 

and CN55 Contactors and Starters (Size 7, 8) 


Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1 

Description 

Part No. Part No. Part No. Part No. 

Renewal Parts Publication Number 20848 20848 20849 20849 

Contact Kits 

Two-pole — — — — 

Three-pole 6-613 6-613 6-571 6-571 

Magnet Coils 

Coil Suffix 

120V 60 Hz or 110V 50 Hz A 9-2698 9-2698 9-2654 9-2654 

240V 60 Hz or 220V 50 Hz B 9-2698-2 9-2698-2 9-2654-2 9-2654-2 

480V 60 Hz or 440V 50 Hz C 9-2698-3 9-2698-3 9-2654-3 9-2654-3 

600V 60 Hz or 550V 50 Hz D 9-2698-4 9-2698-4 9-2654-4 9-2654-4 

208V 60 Hz E 9-2698-5 9-2698-5 9-2654-6 9-2654-6 

277V 60 Hz H — — — — 

208/240V 60 Hz J — — — — 

240V 50 Hz K — — — — 

380–415V 50 Hz L — — — — 

380V 50 Hz L 9-2698-6 9-2698-6 9-2654-5 9-2654-5 

415V 50 Hz M — — — — 

550V 50 Hz N — — — — 

24V 60 Hz–24V 50 Hz T — — — — 

24V 60 Hz T — — — — 

24V 50 Hz U — — — — 

32V 50 Hz V — — — — 

48V 60 Hz W — — — — 

48V 50 Hz Y — — — — 

Overload Relays 

For replacement on existing starters three-pole—ambient compensated bimetallic C306DN3B C306DN3B C306DN3B C306DN3B 

Current Transformer 42-3598-2 42-3598-2 42-3598-3 42-3598-3 

Magnet Frame Armature 

Lower magnet frame — — — — 

Upper magnet frame — — — — 

Notes 

 


 

Consult factory. 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Feeder Group Renewal 


Volts 

Hertz 

Series A1 Series B1 Series A1 Series B1 

110–120 50/60 9-2705 9-2705 — — 

220–240 50/60 9-2705-2 9-2705-2 — — 

440–480 50/60 9-2705-3 9-2705-3 — — 

550–600 50/60 9-2705-4 9-2705-4 — — 

208 50/60 9-2705-5 9-2705-5 — — 

380–415 50/60 9-2705-6 9-2705-6 — — 

48–52 50/60 9-2705-8 9-2705-8 — — 

120 50/60 — — 9-2664 9-2664 

240 50/60 — — 9-2664-2 9-2664-2 

480 50/60 — — 9-2664-3 9-2664-3 

600 50/60 — — 9-2664-4 9-2664-4 

380 50/60 — — 9-2664-5 9-2664-5 

208 50/60 — — 9-2664-6 9-2664-6 

415 50/60 — — 9-2664-7 9-2664-7 

110 50/60 — — 9-2664-8 9-2664-8 

220 50/60 — — 9-2664-9 9-2664-9 

550 50/60 — — 9-2664-10 9-2664-10 

440 50/60 — — 9-2664-11 9-2664-11 

Note 

 

Voltage ratings of the main coils must match those of the feeder group for proper operation of the starter/contactor. 




33.1 


All data is based on a standard 

contactor with no auxiliary 

devices and a 120 Vac or 

24 Vdc magnet coil. Coil data 

has a ±5% range depending 

on the application, therefore 

specific data may vary. 

Coil Data Notes 

P.U. Pick-up time is the average time taken from closing of the coil circuit 

to main contact touch 

D.O. Drop-out time is the average time taken from opening of the coil circuit 

to main contact separation 

Cold Coil data with a cold coil 

Hot Coil data with a hot coil 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Specifications—Sizes 00–3 

Description 

Contactor Catalog Number/Size 

CN15A 


CN15B 


CN15D 


CN15G 


CN15K 


Configuration 

Number of poles 2, 3, 4 2, 3 2, 3, 4, 5 2, 3, 4, 5 2, 3 

Auxiliary contacts, standard 4th pole NO (1) Side NO (1) Side NO (1) Side NO (1) Side NO (1) 

Add-on auxiliary contacts Top (4) or side (4) Top (4) or side (3) Top (4) or side (3) Top (4) or side (3) Left side (4) or right side (3) 

Frame size 45 mm 45 mm 65 mm 65 mm 90 mm 

Maximum voltage rating 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 

Continuous ampere ratings (I) 9A 18A 27A 45A 90A 

Maximum Horsepower (hp) 

Single-phase 

115V 1/3 1 2 3 7-1/2 

230V 1 2 3 7-1/2 15 

Three-phase 

200V 1-1/2 3 7-1/2 10 25 

230V 1-1/2 3 7-1/2 15 30 

460V 2 5 10 25 50 

575V 2 5 10 25 50 

AC Magnet Coil Data 

Pick-up volts—cold 74% 74% 74% 74% 72% 

Pick-up volts—hot 78% 78% 78% 78% 76% 

Pick-up voltamperes 80 100 230 230 390 

Pick-up watts 49 65 95 95 112 

Sealed voltamperes 7.5 10 28 28 49.8 

Sealed watts 2.4 3.1 7.8 7.8 13 

Drop-out volts—cold 75% 75% 75% 75% 75% 

Drop-out volts—hot 75% 75% 75% 75% 75% 

Maximum operation rate—ops/hour 12,000 12,000 12,000 12,000 7,200 

Pick-up time (ms) 12 12 20 20 14 

Drop-out time (ms) 12 12 14 14 11 

Coil operating range % of rated voltage –15% to +10% –15% to +10% –15% to +10% –15% to +10% –15% to +10% 

DC magnet coil data 

For DC magnet coils (and 

coil data), see Accessories, 

Pages 28 and 29. 













Operating temperature –20° to 65°C –20° to 65°C –20° to 65°C –20° to 65°C –20° to 65°C 

Maximum operating altitude (ft) 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 

Mechanical life 20,000,000 20,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 6,000,000 

Electrical Life (480V/60 Hz) 

AC-3 4,000,000 3,000,000 5,000,000 3,500,000 1,700,000 

AC-4 90,000 85,000 200,000 62,000 80,000 

Wire Range 

Power terminals 

Control terminals 

12–16 stranded, 

12–14 solid Cu 







8–14 stranded or 

solid Cu 



2–14 (upper) and/or 

6–14 (lower) stranded 

or solid Cu 



1/0–14 Cu 



Power terminal torque 

7 15 20 40 (14–8 AWG) 35 (14–10 AWG) 

Line and load—lb-in 

45 (6–4 AWG) 40 (8 AWG) 

50 (3 AWG) 45 (6–4 AWG) 

50 (3–1/0 AWG) 

Auxiliary contact rating A600, P300 A600, P300 A600, P300 A600, P300 A600, P300 




33.1 

Specifications—Sizes 4–8 

Description 

Note 

 

20–30% of rated coil voltage. 

Contactor Catalog Number/Size 

CN15N 


CN15S 


CN15T 


CN15U 


CN15V 


Configuration 

Number of poles 2, 3 2, 3 3 3 3 

Auxiliary contacts, standard Side NO (1) Side NO (1) Top left 2NO/2NC (1) Top left 2NO/2NC (1) Side 2NO/NC (1) 

Add-on auxiliary contacts Left side (3) or right side (4) Left side (3) or right side (4) Top right 2NO/2NC (1) Top right 2NO/2NC (1) NO/NC (2) 

Frame size 180 mm 180 mm 280 mm 280 mm 334 mm 

Maximum voltage rating 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac 

Continuous ampere ratings (I) 135A 270A 540A 810A 1215A 

Maximum Horsepower (hp) 

Single-phase 

115V — — — — — 

230V — — — — — 

Three-phase 

200V 40 75 150 200 400 

230V 50 100 200 300 450 

460V 100 200 400 600 900 

575V 100 200 400 600 900 

AC Magnet Coil Data 

Pick-up volts—cold 72.5% 75% 75% 75% 75% 

Pick-up volts—hot 76% 77% 75% 75% 75% 

Pick-up voltamperes 1158 1158 1600 1600 2450 

Pick-up watts 240 240 1345 1345 2060 

Sealed voltamperes 100 100 25 25 75 

Sealed watts 27.2 27.2 22 22 60 

Drop-out volts—cold 75% 75% 

 

Drop-out volts—hot 75% 75% 

 

Maximum operation rate—ops/hour 2400 2400 N/A N/A N/A 

Pick-up time (ms) 28 25 105 105 70 

Drop-out time (ms) 14 13 200 200 50 

Coil operating range % of rated voltage –15% to +10% –15% to +10% –15% to +10% –15% to +10% –15% to +10% 

DC magnet coil data 
















Operating temperature –20° to 65°C –20° to 65°C –20° to 65°C –20° to 65°C –20° to 65°C 

Maximum operating altitude (ft) 6000 6000 6000 6,00 6000 

Mechanical life 5,000,000 5,000,000 5,000,000 5,000,000 5,000,000 

Electrical Life (480V/60 Hz) 

AC-3 800,000 500,000 590,000 450,000 420,000 

AC-4 70,000 34,000 7400 5000 4200 

Wire Range 

Power terminals 

Control Terminals 

Open—3/0–8 Cu; 

Enclosed—250 kcmil– 

6 Cu/Al 



750 kcmil—2 or 

(2) 250 kcmil–3/0 Cu/Al 



(2) 750 kcmil–3/0 Cu/Al (3) 750 kcmil–3/0 Cu/Al (4) 750 kcmil–1/0 Cu/Al 







Power terminal torque line and load—lb-in 200 550 550 550 500 

Auxiliary contact rating A600, P300 A600, P300 A600, P300 A600, P300 A600, P300 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Electrical Life—AC-3 and AC-4 Utilization Categories 

Life Load Curves 

Eaton’s Freedom Series 

NEMA contactors have been 

designed and manufactured 

for superior life performance 

in any worldwide application. 

All testing has been based on 

requirements as found in 

NEMA and UL standards and 

conducted by Eaton. Actual 

application life may vary 

depending on environmental 

conditions and application 

duty cycle. 

AC-3 and AC-4 Utilization Categories 

Operations Operations 

100,000,000 

10,000,000 

1,000,000 

100,000 

100,000,000 

10,000,000 

1,000,000 

100,000 

9 

1 10 

Utilization Categories 

The International 

Electrotechnical Commission 

(IEC) has developed utilization 

categories for contactors and 

auxiliary contacts. The IEC 

utilization categories are used 

to define the type of electrical 

load for estimating electrical 

life, and do not imply the 

devices are IEC rated. 

AC-1—Non-inductive or 

slightly inductive loads, 

such as resistance furnaces 

and heating. 

Size 00 

Size 0 

Size 1 

Size 2 

Size 3 

Break Amperes 

NEMA AC-3 Load Life, Sizes 00–5, 480V 60 Hz 

Size 4 

AC-2—Starting of slip-ring 

motors. 

AC-3—Squirrel cage motors; 

starting, switching off motors 

during running. 

AC-4—Squirrel cage motors; 

starting, plugging, inching 

or jogging. 

Note: AC-3 tests are conducted 

at rated device currents and AC-4 

tests are conducted at six times 

rated device currents. All tests 

have been run at 460V, 60 Hz. 

Size 5 

18 27 45 90 135 270 

100 1000 

Size 00 

Size 0 

Size 1 

10,000 

54 108 153 270 540 822 1620 

1 10 

100 1000 10,000 

Break Amperes 

NEMA AC-4 Load Life, Sizes 00–5, 480V 60 Hz 

Size 2 

Size 3 

Size 4 

Size 5 

Contactor Choice 

● 

Decide what utilization 

category your application 

is and choose the 

appropriate curve 

● 

Locate the intersection of 

the life-load curve of the 

appropriate contactor with 

the applications operational 

current (I e ), as found on 

the horizontal axis 

● Read the estimated 

contact life along the 

vertical axis in number 

of operational cycles 




33.1 

32A Overload—C306DN3B 

Contents 

Description 

Page 






Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 

Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 


Relays—Thermal Overload 


Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 

Modifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 


Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 


33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 



C306 Overload Relays are 

designed for use with CE 

or CN non-reversing and 

reversing contactors. Four 

sizes are available for 

overload protection up 

to 144A. 

Features 

● Selectable manual or 

automatic reset operation 

● Interchangeable heater 

packs adjustable ±24% 

to match motor FLA and 

calibrated for use with 

1.0 and 1.15 service factor 

motors. Heater packs for 

32A overload relay will 

mount in 75A overload 

relay—useful in derating 

applications such as 

jogging 

● Class 10 or 20 

heater packs 

● Load lugs built into 

relay base 

● Bimetallic, ambient 

compensated operated. 

Trip free mechanism 

● 

Electrically isolated NO-NC 

contacts (pull RESET 

button to test). (Electrical 

ratings see table on 

Page 47) 

● 

Overload trip indication 

● Shrouded or fingerproof 

terminals to reduce 

possibility of electrical 

shock 


● Meets UL 508 singlephasing 

requirements 

● UL listed, CSA certified, 

NEMA compliance and 

CE mark 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


C306 Thermal Overload Relays 

C306DN3B 

C306GN3B 

C306DT3B 

C306GT3B 

Contactors 


Standalone Applications 

Maximum 

Ampere Rating 

Number 

of Poles 

Open Type 


 

NEMA Sizes 5–8 use the 32A overload in conjunction with CTs. 

 

Series B overload relays have load lugs built into relay base and will only accept Series B heater packs. These relays 

can be directly attached to contactor or they can be DIN rail or panel mounted using adapter on Page 45. 

 

These relays can be panel mounted only. 

 

Overload relay assembled with mounting adapter for DIN rail or panel mount. 

 

Panel mount only. 

 

NEMA Sizes 5–8 use the 32A overload in conjunction with CTs. 

NEMA 1 Enclosed 


00, 0 32 3 C306DN3B C306DG3B 

1, 2 75 3 C306GN3B C306GG3B 

3 105 3 C306KN3 — 

4 144 3 C306NN3 — 

5–8 — — — — 


Maximum 

Ampere Rating 

Number 

of Poles 

Open Type 


00, 0, 1 32 3 C306DT3B 

1 75 3 C306GT3B 

3 105 3 C306KN3 

4 144 3 C306NN3 

5–8 — — — 




33.1 

Heater Pack Selection 

Heater packs H2001B to 

H2017B and H2101B to 

H2117B are to be used only 

with Series B overload relays 

Catalog Numbers C306DN3B 

(Part No. 10-7016) and 

C306GN3B (Part No. 

10-7020). The load lugs are 

built into the overload relay 

base to allow load wiring prior 

to heater pack installation. 

The previous heater design 

had integral load lugs. The 

Series B heater packs are 

electrically equivalent to the 

previous heater design. 

Heaters H2018-3 to H2024-3 

have not changed. 

Starters with Series B Overload Relays 

NEMA—AN Type 

IEC—AE Type 

Size Series Size Series 

00–0 C A–F C 

1–2 B G–K B 

5 B G–K B 

6 C G–K B 

7–8 B G–K B 

Heater Pack 

H2001B–H2017B 

Standard Trip—Class 20 Heater 

Motor Full Load Ampere Rating 

Dial Position 

Overload Relay Size 

A B C D 

Notes 

 

The series of a starter is the last digit of the listed catalog number. Example: AN16DN0AB. 

 

Heater packs are shipped three to a carton. catalog numbers are for three heater packs. 

Catalog Number 

For Use with NEMA Sizes 00–0 Series C, NEMA Sizes 1–2 Series B; IEC Sizes A–F Series C, IEC Sizes G–K Series B 

32A or 75A 0.254 0.306 0.359 0.411 H2001B-3 

0.375 0.452 0.530 0.607 H2002B-3 

0.560 0.676 0.791 0.907 H2003B-3 

0.814 0.983 1.15 1.32 H2004B-3 

1.20 1.45 1.71 1.96 H2005B-3 

1.79 2.16 2.53 2.90 H2006B-3 

2.15 2.60 3.04 3.49 H2007B-3 

3.23 3.90 4.56 5.23 H2008B-3 

4.55 5.50 6.45 7.40 H2009B-3 

6.75 8.17 9.58 11.0 H2010B-3 

9.14 10.8 12.4 14.0 H2011B-3 

14.0 16.9 19.9 22.8 H2012B-3 

18.7 22.7 26.7 30.7 H2013B-3 

23.5 28.5 33.5 38.5 H2014B-3 

For Use with NEMA Size 2, IEC Sizes G–K Only, Series B 

75A 29.0 34.0 39.1 44.1 H2015B-3 

39.6 45.5 51.5 57.4 H2016B-3 

53.9 60.9 67.9 74.9 H2017B-3 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Heater Pack 

H2018–H2024 

Standard Trip—Class 20 Heater, continued 


Dial Position 


A B C D 

Notes 


Sizes 5–8 and IEC P–Z use the 32A overload relay with current transformers. 


For Use with NEMA Sizes 3–4, IEC Sizes L–N Only—Series A 

105A or 144A 8.0 9.2 10.3 11.5 H2025-3 

11.4 12.8 14.3 15.7 H2026-3 

14.3 15.7 17.4 19.0 H2027-3 

18.0 20.2 22.3 24.5 H2018-3 

24.6 27.6 30.5 33.4 H2019-3 

33.5 37.5 41.5 45.6 H2020-3 

45.7 51.2 56.7 62.1 H2021-3 

62.2 69.7 77.1 84.6 H2022-3 

84.7 95.0 105.0 115.0 H2023-3 

106.0 118.0 131.0 144.0 H2024-3 

For Use with Size 5 Starters—Series B and IEC P, R and S with 300/5 CT 

32A 49 59 69 79 H2004B-3 

72 87 103 118 H2005B-3 

107 130 152 174 H2006B-3 

129 156 182 209 H2007B-3 

194 234 274 — H2008B-3 

For Use with Size 6 Starters Only—Series B and IEC T–V with 600/5 CT 

32A 144 174 205 235 H2005B-3 

215 259 304 348 H2006B-3 

258 312 365 419 H2007B-3 

388 468 547 627 H2008B-3 

For Use with Size 7 Starters Only—Series B and IEC W–X with 1000/5 CT 

32A 163 197 230 264 H2004B-3 

240 290 342 392 H2005B-3 

358 432 506 580 H2006B-3 

430 520 608 698 H2007B-3 

646 780 912 — H2008B-3 

For Use Size 8 Starters Only—Series B and IEC Z with 1500/5 CT 

32A 244 295 345 396 H2004B-3 

360 435 513 588 H2005B-3 

537 648 759 870 H2006B-3 

645 780 912 1047 H2007B-3 

969 1170 1368 — H2008B-3 




33.1 

Heater Pack 

H2101B–H2117B 

Fast Trip—Class 10 Heater 


Dial Position 


A B C D 

Notes 

 


 

Sizes 5–8 and IEC P–Z use the 32A overload relay with current transformers. 


For Use with NEMA Sizes 00–0 Series C, NEMA Sizes 1–2 Series B; IEC Sizes A–F Series C, IEC Sizes G–K Series B 

32A or 75A 0.260 0.313 0.367 0.420 H2101B-3 

0.384 0.464 0.543 0.623 H2102B-3 

0.570 0.688 0.806 0.924 H2103B-3 

0.846 1.02 1.20 1.37 H2104B-3 

1.28 1.55 1.83 2.10 H2105B-3 

1.92 2.33 2.74 3.15 H2106B-3 

2.30 2.79 3.28 3.77 H2107B-3 

3.38 4.10 4.82 5.54 H2108B-3 

4.96 6.03 7.09 8.16 H2109B-3 

7.07 8.58 10.1 11.6 H2110B-3 

9.60 11.2 12.8 14.4 H2111B-3 

14.4 17.5 20.7 23.8 H2112B-3 

18.7 21.8 25.0 28.1 H2113B-3 

23.5 27.3 31.0 34.8 H2114B-3 

For Use with Size 2, IEC Sizes G–K Only—Series B 

75A 28.3 32.6 37.0 41.3 H2115B-3 

36.6 42.3 48.1 53.8 H2116B-3 

53.8 60.8 67.9 74.9 H2117B-3 

For Use with Size 5 Starters Only—Series B and IEC P, R and S with 300/5 CT 

32A 51 61 72 82 H2104B-3 

77 93 110 126 H2105B-3 

115 140 164 189 H2106B-3 

138 167 197 226 H2107B-3 

203 246 289 — H2108B-3 

For Use with Size 6 Starters Only—Series B and IEC T–V with 600/5 CT 

32A 154 186 220 252 H2105B-3 

230 280 329 378 H2106B-3 

276 335 394 452 H2107B-3 

406 492 578 — H2108B-3 

For Use with Size 7 Starters Only—Series B and IEC W–X with 1000/5 CT 

32A 169 204 240 274 H2104B-3 

256 310 366 420 H2105B-3 

384 466 543 630 H2106B-3 

460 558 656 754 H2107B-3 

676 820 — — H2108B-3 

For Use with Size 8 Starters Only—Series B and IEC Z with 1500/5 CT 

32A 254 306 360 411 H2104B-3 

384 465 549 630 H2105B-3 

576 699 822 945 H2106B-3 

690 837 984 1131 H2107B-3 

1014 1230 — — H2108B-3 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Accessories 

DIN Rail and Panel Mounting Adapter 

These adapters are required adapter includes line 

when component overload terminals and connects 

relays are to be separately with the overload relays 

mounted. The terminal base on Page 40. 

C306TB1 

DIN Rail and Panel Mounting Adapter 

Description 


For 32A overload relay 

C306TB1 

For 75A overload relay 

C306TB2B 

Locking Cover for Overload Relay—C306 Only 

Snap-on transparent or 

dial—helps prevent accidental 

opaque plastic panel for 

or unauthorized changes to 

covering access port to the trip and reset setting. 

overload relay trip setting 

Overload Relay Cover 

Locking Cover for Overload Relay— 

C306 Only 

Description 

Min. Order Qty. 

(Std. Pkg.) 

Catalog 

Number 

Clear cover, no accessibility 50 C320PC3 

Gray cover, no accessibility with 50 C320PC4 

auto only nib 

Gray cover, no accessibility with 50 C320PC5 

manual only nib 

Gray cover with FLA dial 50 C320PC6 

accessibility, A, B, C, D positions 

and auto only nib 

Gray cover with FLA dial 

accessibility, A, B, C, D positions 

and manual only nib 

50 C320PC7 

Notes 

 

This Series B adapter will accept Series A or B overload relays (C306GN3 or C306GN3B), 

C306TB2 can only be used with C306GN3. 

Modifications 

C306 Thermal Overload Relays with Mounting Adapter 

Consists of a thermal 

permits fast and easy 

overload relay mounted to a installation. 

terminal base adapter— 

C306 Thermal Overload Relays with Mounting Adapter 

Description 


C306DN3B + C306TB1 

C306GN3B + C306TB2B 

C306DT3B 

C306GT3B 




33.1 

Replacement Parts 

Heater Pack Replacement 

The heater pack series is 

determined by the 6th 

character of the catalog 

number. Series A or prior 

heater packs (identified by 

either “A” or “-” as the 6th 

character) have built-in load 

lugs. Series B or later heater 

Superseded Series A 

Heater Pack 

Series B 

Heater Pack 

packs do not (load lugs are on 

overload relay). Replacement 

of Series A or earlier heater 

packs with Series B or later 

heater packs, requires the 

one time addition of Lug 

Adapter Kit C3606KAL1-3B to 

the Series A1 overload relay. 

Heater Pack Replacement Requirements 

Existing Heater Pack 

Catalog Numbers Replacement Product Required 

H2001-3–H2013-3 

H2001A-3–H2013A-3 

H2001B-3–H2013B-3 

H2014-3 

H2014A-3 

H2014B-3 

H2015-3–H2017-3 

H2015A-3–H2017A-3 

H2015B-3–H2017B-3 

Lug adapter kit C306KAL1-3B and 

Series B heater pack 


When inventory is exhausted, replace 

with lug adapter kit C3606KAL1-3B 

and Series B heater pack 


When inventory is exhausted, 

replace with heater pack chosen 

from table below 

When inventory is exhausted, replace 

with lug adapter kit C3606KAL1-3B 

and Series B heater pack 


Heater Pack Ratings 


Dial Position 

Order Heater Pack 

A B C D 


29.0 32.5 36.0 39.5 H2015B-3 

39.6 44.3 49.1 53.8 H2016B-3 

53.9 60.4 66.8 74.9 H2017B-3 

Overload Relay Lug Adapter Kit 

Superseded 32A Series A 

Overload Relay—C306DN3 

These kits are used in 

conjunction with Catalog 

Numbers H2001B–H2014B 

or H2101B–H2114B heater 

packs as a means of utilizing 

these Series B heater packs 

in Catalog Numbers 

C306DN3 and C306GN3 

Series Al overload relays. The 

kit consists of three lug 

C306KAL1 

Overload Relay Lug 

Description 

Overload Relay Replacement— 

Series A Only 

When replacing a Catalog 

Number C306DN3 (Part No. 

10-6044) or C306GN3 (10- 

6319) Series A overload relay 

on a starter, order a Series B 

overload relay and Series B 

heater packs. 

Series Al overload relay lug adapter kit 

Superseded 75A Series A 

Overload Relay—C306GN3 

adapters and installation 

instructions. When installing 

Series B heater packs plus 

lug adapters in Series A 

overload relays, refer to 

heater pack FLA adjustment 

tables originally supplied with 

equipment (also supplied 

with kit). 


C306KAL1-3B 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


Operation 

C306 Overload Relay Setting 

For motors having a 1.15 

service factor, rotate the 

FLA (Full Load Amperes) 

adjustment dial to correspond 

to the motor’s FLA rating. 

Estimate the dial position 

when the motor FLA falls 

between two letter values as 

shown in the example. 

For motors having a 1.0 

service factor, rotate the 

FLA dial one-half position 

counterclockwise (CCW). 

FLA Dial Adjustment 

1.0 

Service 

Factor 

A 

B 

1.15 

Service 

Factor 

Example of 12.0 FLA setting 

for heater pack number H2011B 

showing position for 

1.0 or 1.15 service 

factor motors. 

Class 10 and Class 20 Trip Curves 

Trip Time 

(Seconds) 

10,000 

5000 

4000 

3000 

2000 

1000 

500 

400 

300 

200 

100 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

C 

D 

The overload relay is factory 

set at M for manual reset 

operation. For automatic 

reset operation, turn the 

reset adjustment dial to the 

A position as shown in the 

illustration. 

Automatic reset is not 

intended for two-wire 

control devices. 

Manual/Automatic Reset 

M 

A 

Example of setting for 

manual reset. 

2 4 6 8 10 

Multiples of Current Setting 

Class 10 Overload Relay 25°C Open Rating 

Test for Trip Indication 

To test overload relay for trip 

indication when in manual 

reset, pull out the blue reset 

button. An orange flag will 

appear indicating that the 

device has tripped. Push 

reset button in to reset. 

Warning—To provide 

continued protection against 

fire or shock hazard, the 

complete overload relay must 

From 

Cold Start 

From 

Hot Start 

be replaced if burnout of the 

heater element occurs. 

General 

“Overload relays are provided 

to protect motors, motor 

control apparatus and motorbranch 

circuit conductors 

against excessive heating 

due to motor overloads and 

failure to start. This definition 

does not include: 1) motor 

circuits over 600V, 2) short 

circuits, 3) ground faults 

and 4) fire pump control.” 

(NEC Art. 430-31) 

Time Current Characteristics 

The time-current 

characteristics of an overload 

relay is an expression of 

performance which defines 

its operating time at various 

multiples of its current 

setting. Tests are run at 

Underwriters Laboratories 

(UL) in accordance with 

NEMA Standards and the 

NEC. UL requires: 

● When tested at 100 

percent of its current 

rating, the overload relay 

shall trip ultimately 

Trip Time 

(Seconds) 

10,000 

5000 

4000 

3000 

2000 

1000 

500 

400 

300 

200 

100 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

2 4 6 8 10 

Multiples of Current Setting 

Class 20 Overload Relay 25°C Open Rating 

● 

When tested at 200 

percent of its current rating, 

the overload relay shall trip 

in not more than 8 minutes 

● 

When tested at 600 percent 

of the current rating, the 

overload relay shall trip 

in not more than 10 or 

20 seconds, depending 

on the Class of the relay 

“Current Rating” is defined 

as the minimum current at 

which the relay will trip. Per 

NEC, an overload must 

ultimately trip at 125% of FLA 

current (heater) setting for a 

1.15 service factor motor and 

115% FLA for a 1.0 service 

factor motor. 

“Current Setting” is defined 

as the FLA of the motor and 

thus the overload heater 

pack setting. 

Example: 600% of current 

rating is defined as 750% 

(600 x 1.25) of FLA current 

(heater) setting for a 1.15 

service factor motor. A 10A 

heater setting must trip in 20 

seconds or less at 75A motor 

current for a Class 20 relay. 

From 

Cold Start 

From 

Hot Start 




33.1 

Wire (75°C) Sizes—AWG or kcmil—NEMA Sizes 00–2, IEC A–K—Open 

Power Terminals—Line 

IEC Size NEMA Size Cu Only 

A, B, C 00 12–16 stranded, 12–14 solid 

D, E, F 0 8 –16 stranded, 10–14 solid 

1 8–14 stranded or solid 

G, H, J, K 2 3–14 (upper) and/or 6–14 (lower) stranded or solid 

Power Terminals—Load—Cu Only (Stranded or Solid) 

Catalog Number Terminal Wire Size 

C306DN3B 32A 14–6 AWG 

C306GN3B 75A 14–2 AWG 



Wire (75°C) Sizes—AWG or kcmil—NEMA Sizes 3–8, IEC L–N—Open 

Power Terminals—Line and Load 

IEC Size NEMA Size Wire Size 

L 3 1/0–14 Cu/Al 

M — 1/0–8 Cu/Al 

N — 3/0–8 Cu/Al 

— 4 Open—3/0–8 Cu 

Enclosed—250 kcmil—6 Cu/Al 

— 5 750 kcmil—2 or (2) 250 kcmil—3/0 Cu/Al 

6–7 (2) 750 kcmil—3/0 Cu/Al 

8 (2) 750 kcmil—1/0 Cu/Al 



Power Terminal Torque Line and Load Terminals 

Catalog Number Terminal Torque in lb-in 

C306DT3B 32A 20 

C306GT3B 75A 35 (14–10 AWG) 

40 (8 AWG) 

45 (6–4 AWG) 

50 (3–2 AWG) 

C306KN3 

(socket head screw) 

105A 120 (3/16) 

200 (1/4) 

250 (5/16) 

C306NN3 

(socket head screw) 

144A 120 (3/16) 

200 (1/4) 

250 (5/16) 

C306NN3 

(slotted head screw) 

35 (14–10 AWG) 

40 (8 AWG) 

45 (6–4 AWG) 

50 (3–1/0 AWG) 



00 — 1/2 1/2 1/2 

0 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 

1 3 3 5 5 

2 7-1/2 10 15 15 

3 15 20 30 30 

4 25 30 60 60 

5 60 75 150 150 

6 125 150 300 300 

Overload Relay UL/CSA Contact Ratings Control Circuit 

AC Volts 120V 240V 480V 600V 

NC Contact B600 

Make and break amperes 30 15 7.5 6 

Break amperes 3 1.5 0.75 0.6 

Continuous amperes 5 5 5 5 

NO Contact C600 

Make and break amperes 15 7.5 3.375 3 

Break amperes 1.5 0.75 0.375 0.3 

Continuous amperes 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 

Notes 

 


 

Maximum horsepower where operation is interrupted more than 5 times per minute or more 

than 10 times in a 10 minute period. NEMA standard ICS 2-1993 table 2-4-3. 

 

DC ratings cover Freedom Series coils only. 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Dimensions 


Stand-Alone Overload Relays 

32A and 75A Sizes—C306DT38 and C306GT3B 

F 

B 

D 

A 


Ampere 

Size 

105A and 144A Sizes—C306KN38 and C306NN3B 

G 

C 

A C 

E 

Wide 

A 

High 

B 

Deep 

C 

E 

B 

D 


1/4-20 Screws 

Mounting 

D E F (Slot) G (Hole) 


Lbs (kg) 

32A 1.77 (45.0) 4.13 (104.9) 3.69 (93.7) 1.36 (34.5) 3.74 (95.0) 0.18 x 0.30 (4.6 x 7.6) 0.18 (4.6) dia. 0.8 (0.4) 

75A 2.54 (64.5) 4.69 (119.1) 3.74 (95.0) 2.00 (50.8) 3.45 (87.6) 0.22 x 0.26 (5.6 x 6.6) 0.21 (5.3) dia. 1.4 (0.6) 

105 and 144A 4.00 (101.6) 7.17 (182.1) 4.91 (124.7) 3.00 (76.2) 6.62 (168.1) — — 4.0 (1.8) 




33.1 

C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay 



Eaton’s new electronic 

overload relay (EOL) is 

the most compact, highfeatured, 

economical product 

in its class. Designed on a 

global platform, the new 

EOL covers the entire power 

control spectrum including 

NEMA, IEC and 

DP contactors. The NEMA 

and DP versions are offered 

with the C440 designation 

while the IEC offering has the 

XT designation. The 

electronic design provides 

reliable, accurate and value 

driven protection and 

communications capabilities 

in a single compact device. It 

is the flexible choice for any 

application requiring easy-touse, 

reliable protection. 

Eaton has a long history of 

innovations and product 

development in motor control 

and protection, including both 

traditional NEMA, as well as 

IEC control. It was from this 

experience that the C440 

was developed, delivering 

new solutions to meet 

today’s demands. 

C440 is a self-powered 

electronic overload relay 

available up to 100A as a 

self contained unit. With 

external CTs, C440 can 

protect motor up to 

1500 FLA. Available add-on 

accessories include remote 

reset capability and 

communication modules 

with I/O for DeviceNet, 

PROFIBUS, and Modbus. 

Contents 

Description 

Page 






Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 

Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 





Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 


Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 

Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 

Features and Benefits 

Features 

● Reliable, accurate, electronic motor protection 

● Easy to select, install and maintain 

● Compact size 

● Flexible, intelligent design 

● Global product offering—available with NEMA, IEC and DP 

power control 

Size/Range 

● Broad FLA range 

(0.33–1500A) 

● Selectable trip class 

(10A, 10, 20, 30) 

● Direct mounting to NEMA, 

IEC and DP contactors 

● Most compact electronic 

overload in its class 

Motor Control 

● Two B600 alarm (NO) and 

fault (NC) contacts 

● Test/Trip button 

Motor Protection 

● Thermal overload 

● 

Phase loss 

● Selectable (ON/OFF) 

phase unbalance 

● Selectable (ON/OFF) 

ground fault 

User Interface 

● Large FLA selection dial 

● Trip status indicator 

● Operating mode LED 

● DIP switch selectable trip 

class, phase unbalance and 

ground fault 

● Selectable Auto/Manual 

reset 

Feature Options 

● 

Remote reset 

● 120 Vac 

● 24 Vac 

● 

24 Vdc 

● 

● 

Tamper-proof cover 

Communications modules 

● Modbus RTU RS-485 

● DeviceNet with I/O 

● 

PROFIBUS with I/O 

● Modbus RTU with I/O 

(Q4 2010) 

● 

Ethernet IP (planned) 

● 

Smartwire (planned) 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Benefits 

Reliability and Improved 

Uptime 

● 

C440 provides the users 

with peace of mind 

knowing that their 

assets are protected 

with the highest level 

of motor protection and 

communication capability 

in its class 

● Extends the life of plant 

assets with selectable 

motor protection features 

such as trip class, phase 

unbalance and ground fault 

● 

Protects against 

unnecessary downtime 

by discovering changes 

in your system (line/load) 

with remote monitoring 

capabilities 

● Status LED provides 

added assurance that 

valuable assets are 

protected by indicating the 

overload operational status 

Flexibility 

● 

Available with NEMA, 

IEC and DP contactors 

● 

Improves return on 

investment by reducing 

inventory carrying costs 

with wide FLA adjustment 

(5:1) and selectable 

trip class 

● Patented design 

incorporates built-in ground 

fault protection thus 

eliminating the need for 

separate CTs and modules 

● 

Flexible communication 

with optional I/O enables 

easy integration into plant 

management systems for 

remote monitoring and 

control 

● Available as an open 

component and in 

enclosed control and 

motor control center 

assemblies 

Monitoring Capabilities 

● 

Individual phase 

currents RMS 

● 

Average three-phase 

current RMS 

● 

Thermal memory 

● 

Fault indication (overload, 

phase loss, phase 

unbalance, ground fault) 

Safety 

● IP 20 rated terminal blocks 

● Available in Eaton’s 

industry leading FlashGard 

MCCs 

● 

Tested to the highest 

industry standards such 

as UL, CSA, CE and IEC 

● RoHS compliant 


● 

UL 

● 

CSA 

● 

CE 

● 


● 

IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 

● 

ISO 13849-1 (EN954-1) 

● 

RoHS 

● 

ATEX directive 94/9/EC 

● 

Equipment Group 2, 

Category 2 

Electronic Overload Education 

Description Definition Cause Effect if not Protected C440/XT Protection 


Thermal overload 

Overload is a condition in which 

current draw exceeds 115% of 

the full load amperage rating for 

an inductive motor. 

• An increase in the load or torque that is 

being driven by the motor. 

• A low voltage supply to the motor 

causes the current to go high to 

maintain the power needed. 

• A poor power factor causing above 

normal current draw. 

• Increase in current draw leads to heat 

and insulation breakdown, which can 

cause system failure. 

• Increase in current can increase 

power consumption and waste 

valuable energy. 

Ground fault A line to ground fault. A current leakage path to ground. An undetected ground fault can burn 

through multiple insulation windings, 

ultimately leading to motor failure, not to 

mention risk to equipment or personnel 

Unbalanced phases 

(voltage and current) 

Phase loss—current 

(single-phasing) 

Uneven voltage or current 

between phases in a three-phase 

system. 

One of the three-phase voltages is 

not present. 

When a three-phase load is powered with 

a poor quality line, the voltage per phase 

may be unbalanced. 

Multiple causes, loose wire, improper 

wiring, grounded phase, open fuse, etc. 

Unbalanced voltage causes large 

unbalanced currents and as a result this 

can lead to motor stator windings being 

overloaded, causing excessive heating, 

reduced motor efficiency and reduced 

insulation life. 

Single-phasing can lead to unwanted 

motor vibrations in addition to the results 

of unbalanced phases as listed above. 

• Thermal trip behavior is defined by 

UL, CSA and IEC standards. 

• Trip class is settable from 10A, 

10, 20, 30 

Fixed protective setting that takes the 

starter offline if ground fault current 

exceeds 50% of the FLA dial setting, 

i.e., if the FLA dial is set to 12A, the 

overload relay will trip if the ground 

current exceeds 6A. 


starter offline if a phase drops below 

50% of the other two phases. 


starter offline if a phase drops below 

50% of the other two phases. 




33.1 

Catalog Number Selection 

Freedom Series NEMA Starters with C440 Electronic Overload Relays 

A = 

B = 

D = 

G = 

K = 

N = 

S = 

Device Type 

A = Starter 

Device Assembly 

Configuration 

1 = Non-reversing 

5 = Reversing 

Contactor Frame Size 


Size 

00 

0 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

Continuous 

Amperes 

9 

18 

27 

45 

90 

135 

270 

Standard 

N = NEMA 

OLR Type 

9 = Starter w/C440 EOLR 

NEMA Enclosure 

N = Open 

A N 1 9 A N 0 A 5E 005 

For Starters 

Starter Mounting Option 

0 = Horizontal 

AC Coil Suffix 

Suffix Volts and Hertz 

Notes 

 

See Page 52 for Product Selection. 

 


 


 

Starter not shipped as an assembled unit. Order NEMA Size 4 contactor (CN15NN3A) plus current transformers (ZEB-XCT300) 

and 1–5A C440 overload relay (C440A1A005SELAX or C440A2A005SELAX). 

 

NEMA Size 5 starter available with 60-300A panel mounted CTs. Starter shipped as an assembled unit with 

1–5A C440 overload relay (C440A1A005SELAX or C440A2A005SELAX). 

C440 OLR Designation 


5E = Standard feature set 

SEL Reset, SEL Class (10A, 10, 20, 30) 

5G =Ground fault feature set 

SEL Reset, SEL Class (10, 20) 

A = 

B = 

C = 

D = 

E = 

H = 

J = 

K = 

L = 

N = 

T = 

U = 

V = 

W = 

Y = 

120/60 or 110/50 

240/60 or 220/50 

480/60 or 440/50 

600/60 or 550/50 

208/60 

277/60 

208–240/60 

240/50 

380–415/50 

550/50 

24/60, 24/50 

24/50 

32/50 

48/60 

48/50 

C440 FLA Range 



1P6 = 0.33–1.65A 

005 = 1–5A 

020 = 4–20A 


1P6 = 0.33–1.65A 

005 = 1–5A 

020 = 4–20A 


1P6 = 0.33–1.65A 

005 = 1–5A 

020 = 4–20A 

045 = 9–45A 


005 = 1–5A 

020 = 4–20A 

045 = 9–45A 


100 = 20–100A 


— 


300 = 60–300A 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


Type AN19/59 Freedom Series Starters 

Type AN19/59 Freedom Series Starters with C440 Electronic Overload Relays 

NEMA Starter 

Non-Reversing and Reversing 


Continuous Service Limit 

Three-Pole 

Three-Pole 

NEMA Ampere Current Rating Single-Phase Three-Phase 

Non-Reversing Reversing 

Size Rating (Amps) 


00 9 11 1/3 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 AN19AN0_ 5E _ AN59AN0_ 5E _ 

0 18 21 1 2 3 3 5 5 AN19BN0_ 5E _ AN59BN0_ 5E _ 

1 27 32 2 3 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 AN19DN0_ 5E _ AN59DN0_ 5E _ 

2 45 52 3 7-1/2 10 15 25 25 AN19GN0_ 5E _ AN59GN0_ 5E _ 

3 90 104 — — 25 30 50 50 AN19KN0_ 5E _ AN59KN0_ 5E _ 

4 135 156 — — 40 50 100 100 

5 270 311 — — 75 100 200 200 AN19SN0_ 5E _ AN59SN0_ 5E _ 

Type AN19/59 Freedom Series Starters with C440 with Ground Fault Electronic Overload Relays 

NEMA Starter with 

Ground Fault 

Non-Reversing and Reversing 


Continuous Service Limit 

Three-Pole 

Three-Pole 

NEMA Ampere Current Rating Single-Phase Three-Phase 

Non-Reversing Reversing 

Size Rating (Amps) 


00 9 11 1/3 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 AN19AN0_ 5G _ AN59AN0_ 5G _ 

0 18 21 1 2 3 3 5 5 AN19BN0_ 5G _ AN59BN0_ 5G _ 

1 27 32 2 3 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 AN19DN0_ 5G _ AN59DN0_ 5G _ 

2 45 52 3 7-1/2 10 15 25 25 AN19GN0_ 5G _ AN59GN0_ 5G _ 

3 90 104 — — 25 30 50 50 AN19KN0_ 5G _ AN59KN0_ 5G _ 

4 135 156 — — 40 50 100 100 

 

5 270 311 — — 75 100 200 200 AN19SN0_ 5G _ AN59SN0_ 5G _ 

Coil Suffix Codes 

Suffix Coil Volts and Hertz Suffix Coil Volts and Hertz 

A 120/60 or 110/50 L 380–415/50 

B 240/60 or 220/50 N 550/50 

C 480/60 or 440/50 T 24/60, 24/50 

D 600/60 or 550/50 U 24/50 

E 208/60 V 32/50 

H 277/60 W 48/60 

J 208–240/60 Y 48/50 

K 240/50 

Notes 

Underscore (_) indicates coils suffix required, see Coil Suffix table above. 

 

Underscore (_) indicates OLR designation required, see C440 FLA Range table above. 

 

Starter not shipped as an assembled unit. Order NEMA Size 4 contactor (CN15NN3A) plus current transformers (ZEB-XCT300) 

and 1–5A C440 overload relay (C440A1A005SELAX or C440A2A005SELAX). 

 

NEMA Size 5 starter available with 60-300A panel mounted CTs. Starter shipped as an assembled unit with 

1–5A C440 overload relay (C440A1A005SELAX or C440A2A005SELAX). 

C440 FLA Range (FVNR and FVR Starters Only) 

NEMA Size OLR Code FLA Range OLR Code FLA Rating 

00 1P6 0.33–1.65A 020 4.0–20A 

005 1.0–5.0A — — 

0 1P6 0.33–1.65A 020 4.0–20A 

005 1.0–5.0A — — 

1 1P6 0.33–1.65A 020 4.0–20A 

005 1.0–5.0A 045 9.0–45A 

2 005 1.0–5.0A 045 9.0–45A 

020 4.0–20A — — 

3 100 20–100A — — 

4 300 — — 60–300A 

5 300 60–300A — — 




33.1 

Accessories 

CT Kits 

Safety Cover 

Reset Bar 

Remote Reset 

Accessories 

Description 

Safety Cover 

Clear Lexan cover that mounts on top of the FLA dial and DIP switches when closed. 

Communication 

The C440 is provided with two levels of communication capability. 

Basic Communication via 

Expansion Module— 

Monitoring Only 

Basic communication on 

the C440 is accomplished 

using an expansion module. 

The expansion module plugs 

into the expansion bay on 

the C440 overload relay, 

enabling communications 

with the overload via their 

Modbus RTU (RS-485) 

network. No additional parts 

are required. See 

figure below. 

Basic Communication— 

Modbus 

Reset Bar 

Assembles to the top of the overload to provide a larger target area for door 

mounted reset operators. 

Remote Reset 

Remote reset module (24 Vdc) 

Remote reset module (120 Vac) 

Remote reset module (24 Vac) 

Advanced 

Communication— 

Monitoring and Control 

C440 also has the ability to 

communicate on industrial 

protocols such as DeviceNet, 

PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU and 

Modbus TCP, and Ethernet 

(planned) while providing 

control capability using I/O. 

An expansion module 

(mentioned earlier) combined 

with a communication 

adapter and a communication 

module allows easy 

integration onto the 

customer’s network. See 

figure below. 

Advanced Communication— 

Communication Adapter with 

Communication Module 

Advanced 

Communication— 


The communication adapter 

comes standard with four 

inputs and two outputs 

(24 Vdc or 120 Vac) while 

providing the customer with 

flexible mounting options 

(DIN rail or panel). See 

figure below, 

Note 

 

Customer can wire remote mounted button to reset module (i.e., 22 mm pushbutton, catalog number M22-D-B-GB14-K10). 


ZEB-XSC 

ZEB-XRB 

C440-XCOM 

ZEB-XRR-120 

ZEB-XRR-24 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

The following information can be viewed using the communication option: 

● 

Motor status—running, 

● 

Percent thermal capacity 

● 

Overload relay settings— 

stopped, tripped or 

● 

Fault codes (only available trip class, DIP switch 

resetting 

prior to reset) 

selections, reset selections 

● 

Individual rms phase 

● 

● 

Percent phase unbalance Modbus address (can be 

currents (A, B, C) 

● 

Ground fault current and 

set over the network) 

● 

Average of three-phase 

percent 

rms current 

Expansion Module 

Communication 

Adapter 

Communication Accessories 

Description 

Expansion module (Remote Reset/Modbus RTU, RS-485 Communication) 

Communication adapter kit (DIN C Panel mounted adapter, required for advance communication option) 

DeviceNet communication module kit—120V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441K + C440-COM-ADP) 

DeviceNet communication module kit—24 Vdc I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441L + C440-COM-ADP) 

PROFIBUS communication module kit—120V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441S + C440-COM-ADP) 

PROFIBUS communication module kit—24V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441Q + C440-COM-ADP) 

Modbus communication module kit—120V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441N + C440-COM-ADP) 

Modbus communication module kit—24 Vdc I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441P + C440-COM-ADP) 

Ethernet IP communication module kit—120V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441R + C440-COM-ADP) 


C440-XCOM 

C440-COM-ADP 

C440-DN-120 

C440-DN-24 

C440-DP-120 

C440-DP-24 

C440-MOD-120 

C440-MOD-24 

C440-EIP-120 




33.1 

Modbus Communication Module 

The Modbus module 

combined with an expansion 

module and a communication 

adapter provide Modbus 

communication capability to 

the C440 electronic overload 

relay. 

Modbus 


DeviceNet Communication Modules 

The DeviceNet 


provides monitoring and 

control for the C440 overload 

relay from a single DeviceNet 

node. These modules also 

offer convenient I/O in two 

voltage options, 

24 Vdc and 120 Vac. 

DeviceNet 


PROFIBUS Communication Modules 

The PROFIBUS module 

combined with an expansion 

module and a communication 

adapter provide Modbus 

communication capability to 

the C440 electronic overload 

relay. 

PROFIBUS 



● 

The Modbus 

communication module is 

capable of baud rates 

up to 115K 

● 

The Modbus address and 

baud rate configuration can 

be easily changed using 

the HMi user interface 

● 

Modbus address and baud 

rate are set via convenient 

DIP switches; LEDs are 

provided to display 

Modbus traffic 

● Configuration with 

common Modbus 

configuration tools 


● Communication to 

DeviceNet uses only one 

DeviceNet MAC ID 

● Configuration 

● DeviceNet MAC ID and 

Baud rate are set via 

convenient DIP 

switches with an option 

to set from the network 

● Advanced configuration 

available using common 

DeviceNet tools 


● 

The PROFIBUS 

communication module is 

capable of baud rates 

up to 12 Mb 

● PROFIBUS address is 

set via convenient DIP 

switches; LEDs are 

provided to display 

PROFIBUS status 

● Intuitive configuration 

with common PROFIBUS 

configuration tools 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

Terminals 

● 

Unique locking 

mechanism provides for 

easy removal of the 

terminal block with the 

field wiring installed 

● 

Each terminal is marked 

for ease of wiring and 

troubleshooting 

Selectable I/O assemblies 

● 4IN/2OUT 

● Signal types include 

24 Vdc I/O and 

120 Vac I/O 

Terminals 

● Unique locking 





● Each terminal is marked 




● 4IN/2OUT 



120 Vac I/O 

Terminals 

● Unique locking 





● Each terminal is marked 




● 4IN/2OUT 



120 Vac I/O 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

Each I/O module is 

optically isolated 

between the field I/O 

and the network adapter 

to protect the I/O and 

communication circuits 

from possible damage 

due to transients and 

ground loops 

Input Module features a 

user-definable input 

debounce, which limits 

the effects of transients 

and electrical noise 

Output Module supports 

a user-definable safe 

state for loss of 

communication; hold 

last state, ON or OFF 









ground loops 











Combined status LED 

● 

● 

● 









ground loops 











33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


Electronic Overload Relays up to 1500A 

Specification 

Description 45 mm 55 mm 

Electrical Ratings Range Range 

Operating voltage (three-phase) and frequency 690 Vac (60/50 Hz) 690 Vac (60/50 Hz) 

FLA Range 

0.33–1.65A 

1–5A 

4–20A 

9–45A 20–100A 

Use with Contactors 

XT IEC frames B, C, D F, G 

Freedom NEMA sizes 00, 0, 1, 2 3 

Trip Class 


Thermal overload setting 

10A, 10, 20, 30 

Selectable 

1.05 x FLA: does not trip 

1.15 x FLA: overload trip 

10A, 10, 20, 30 

Selectable 

1.05 x FLA: does not trip 

1.15 x FLA: overload trip 

Feature Range Range 

Phase loss Fixed threshold 50% Fixed threshold 50% 

Phase unbalance (selectable: enable/disable) Fixed threshold 50% Fixed threshold 50% 

Ground fault (selectable: enable/disable) 

50% of FLA dial setting 

>150% = 2 sec 

>250% = 1 sec 

50% of FLA dial setting 

>150% = 2 sec 

>250% = 1 sec 

Reset Manual/automatic Manual/automatic 

Indicators 

Trip status Orange flag Orange flag 

Mode LED 

One flash: Overload operating properly 

Two flashes: Current is above FLA dial setting—pending trip 

Options 

Remote reset Yes Yes 

Reset bar Yes Yes 

Communication expansion module Yes Yes 

Communication adapter Yes Yes 

Capacity 

Load terminals 

Terminal capacity 12–10 AWG (4–6 mm 2 ) 

6–1 AWG (16–50 mm 2 ) 

8–6 AWG (6–16 mm 2 ) 

Tightening torque 

20–25 lb-in (2.3–2.8 Nm) 

25–30 lb-in (2.8–3.4 Nm) 

25–30 lb-in (2.8–3.4 Nm) 

Input, auxiliary contact and remote reset terminals 

Terminal capacity 2 x (18–12) AWG 2 x (18–12) AWG 

Tightening torque 5.3 lb-in (0.8–1.2 Nm) 5.3 lb-in (0.8–1.2 Nm) 

Voltages 

Insulation voltage U i (three-phase) 690 Vac 690 Vac 

Insulation voltage U i (control) 500 Vac 500 Vac 

Rated impulse withstand voltage 6000 Vac 6000 Vac 

Overvoltage category/pollution degree III/3 III/3 

One flash: Overload operating properly 

Two flashes: Current is above FLA dial setting—pending trip 




33.1 

Electronic Overload Relays up to 1500A, continued 

Specification 


Auxiliary and Control Circuit Ratings 

Conventional thermal continuous current 5A 5A 

Rated operational current—IEC AC-15 

Make contact (1800 VA) 

120V 15A 15A 

240V 15A 15A 

415V 0.5A 0.5A 

500V 0.5A 0.5A 

Break contact (180 VA) 

120V 1.5A 1.5A 

240V 1.5A 1.5A 

415V 0.9A 0.9A 

500V 0.8A 0.8A 

IEC DC-13 (L/R F 15 ms1) 

0–250V 1.0A 1.0A 

Rated operational current—UL B600 

Make contact (3600 VA) 

120V 30A 30A 

240V 15A 15A 

480V 7.5A 7.5A 

600V 6A 6A 

Break contact (360 VA) 

120V 3A 3A 

240V 1.5A 1.5A 

480V 0.75A 0.75A 

600V 0.6A 0.6A 

R300—Vdc ratings (28 VA) 

0–120V 0.22A 0.22A 

250V 0.11A 0.11A 

Short-Circuit Rating without Welding 

Maximum fuse 6A gG/gL 6A gG/gL 

Environmental Ratings 

Ambient temperature (operating) –13°F to 149°F (–25°C to 65°C) –13°F to 149°F (–25°C to 65°C) 

Ambient temperature (storage) –40°F to 185°F (–40°C to 85°C) –40°F to 185°F (–40°C to 85°C) 

Operating humidity UL 991 (H3) 5% to 95% non-condensing 5% to 95% non-condensing 

Altitude (no derating) NEMA ICS1 2000m 2000m 

Shock (IEC 600068-2-27) 15g any direction 15g any direction 

Vibration (IEC 60068-2-6) 3g any direction 3g any direction 

Pollution degree per IEC 60947-4-1 3 for product (2 for pcb) 3 for product (2 for pcb) 

Ingress protection IP20 IP20 

Protection against direct contact when actuated from front (IEC 536) Finger- and back-of-hand proof Finger- and back-of-hand proof 

Mounting position Any Any 

Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant to IEC 60068-2-30 Damp heat, constant to IEC 60068-2-30 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Electronic Overload Relays up to 1500A, continued 

Specification 


Electrical/EMC 

Radiated emissions 

30 mHz to 1000 mHz 30 mHz to 1000 mHz 

IEC 60947-4-1-Table 15 

EN 55011 (CISPIR 11) Group 1, Class A, ISM 

Conducted emissions 

0.15 mHz to 30 mHz 0.15 mHz to 30 mHz 

IEC 60947-4-1-Table 14 

EN 55011 (CISPIR 11) Group 1; Class ISM 

ESD immunity 

IEC 60947-4-1 (Table 13) 

±8 kV air, ±6 kV contact ±8 kV air, ±6 kV contact 

Radiated immunity 

IEC 60947-4-1 

IEC 61000-4-3 

Conducted immunity 

IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 61000-4-6 

Fast transient immunity 

IEC 60947-4-1 (Table 13) 

IEC 61000-4-4 

Surge immunity 

IEC 60947-4-1 (Table 13) 

IEC 61000-4-5 a Class 4 

10 V/m 80 mHz–1000 mHz 

3 V/m from 1.4 to 2.7 gHz 

80% amplitude modulated 

1 kHz sine wave 

140 dub (10V rms) 

150 kHz–100 mHz 

±4 kV using direct method 

with accessory installed in expansion bay 


Three-phase power inputs: 

±4 kV line-to-line (DM) 

±4 kV line-to-ground (CM) 

With accessory installed in expansion bay: 

±2 kV line-to-line (DM) –>1.2/50 us; 

2 kV line-to-earth, 1 kV line-to-line 


10 V/m 80 mHz–1000 mHz 

3 V/m from 1.4 to 2.7 gHz 

80% amplitude modulated 

1 kHz sine wave 

140 dub (10V rms) 

150 kHz–100 mHz 


with accessory installed in expansion bay 


Three-phase power inputs: 



With accessory installed in expansion bay: 

±2 kV line-to-line (DM) –>1.2/50 us; 

2 kV line-to-earth, 1 kV line-to-line 


Power freq. magnetic field immunity 

30 A/m, 50 Hz 30 A/m, 50 Hz 

IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 61000-4-8 

Electromagnetic field 

10 V/m 10 V/m 

IEC 60947-4-1 Table 13, IEC 61000-4-3 

Distortion IEEE 519 5% THD max., 5th harmonic 3% max. 5% THD max., 5th harmonic 3% max. 

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 

IEC 61000-4-2, EN 61131-2 

Electrical fast transient (EFT) 

IEC 61000-4-4, EN 61131-2 


IEC 61000-4-5, EN 61131-2 

4 kV contact 

8 kV air discharge 

4 kV contact 

8 kV air discharge 

±2 kV using direct method ±2 kV using direct method 

±2 kV line-to-ground (CM) ±2 kV line-to-ground (CM) 




33.1 

Communication Modules 

Description Modbus DeviceNet PROFIBUS 

Electrical/EMC 

Radiated emissions 

30–1000 mHz 30–1000 mHz 30–1000 mHz 

IEC 60947-4-1—Table 15, EN 55011 

(CISPIR 11) Group 1, Class A 

Conducted emissions 

0.15–30 mHz 0.15–30 mHz 0.15–30 mHz 

IEC 60947-4-1—Table 14, EN 55011 

(CISPIR 11) Group 1, Class A 

ESD immunity 

±8 kV air, ±4 kV contact ±8 kV air, ±4 kV contact ±8 kV air, ±4 kV contact 

IEC 60947-4-1 (Table 13) 

Radiated immunity 

IEC 60947-4-1 

Conducted immunity 

IEC 60947-4-1 

Fast transient immunity 

IEC 60947-4-1 (Table 13) IEC 6100-4-4 


IEC 60947-4-1 (Table 13) 

IEC 61000-4-5 Class 3 

Electromagnetic field 

IEC 60947-4-1 (Table 13) IEC 61000-4-3 

Environmental Ratings 

Note 

Relates to C441M only. 

10 V/m 80–1000 mHz 

80% amplitude modulated 1 kHz sine wave 

140 dBuV (10V rms) 

150 kHz–80 mHz 

10 V/m 80–1000 mHz 




10 V/m 80–1000 mHz 




±2 kV using direct method ±2 kV supply and control, ±1 kV communication ±2 kV supply and control, ±1 kV communication 

User IO and communication lines : 



User IO and communication lines: 

±0.5 kV line-to-line (DM) 


10 V/m 10 V/m 10 V/m 

User IO and communication lines: 

±0.5 kV line-to-line (DM) 


Ambient temperature (operating) –4°F to 122°F (–20°C to 50°C) –13°F to 122°F (–25°C to 50°C) –13°F to 122°F (–25°C to 50°C) 

Ambient temperature (storage) –40°F to 185°F (–40°C to 85°C) –40°F to 185°F (–40°C to 85°C) –40°F to 185°F (–40°C to 85°C) 

Operating humidity 5–95% noncondensing 5–95% noncondensing 5–95% noncondensing 

Altitude (no derating) 2000m 2000m 2000m 

Shock (IEC 600068-2-27) 15G any direction 15G any direction 15G any direction 

Vibration (IEC 60068-2-6) 3G any direction 3G any direction 3G any direction 

Pollution degree per IEC 60947-1 3 3 3 

Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 

Overvoltage category per UL 508 III III III 

DeviceNet 

DeviceNet connections — Group 2, polling, bit strobe, explicit, no UCMM — 

DeviceNet baud rate — 125K, 250K, 500K — 

PROFIBUS 

PROFIBUS connections — — Group 2, polling, bit strobe, explicit, no UCMM 

PROFIBUS baud rate — — 9.6K, 19.2K, 45.45K, 93.75K, 187.5K, 500K, 1.5M, 

3M, 6M, 12M 

C441_ 24 Vdc Input 

Nominal input voltage 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 

Operating voltage 18–30 Vdc 18–30 Vdc 18–30 Vdc 

Number of inputs 4 4 4 

Signal delay 5 ms (programmable to 65 sec) 5 ms (programmable to 65 sec) 5 ms (programmable to 65 sec) 

OFF-state voltage 10 Vdc 

Nominal input current 5 mA 5 mA 5 mA 

Isolation 1500V 1500V 1500V 

Terminal screw torque 7–9 in-lb 7–9 in-lb 7–9 in-lb 

24V source current 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Communication Modules, continued 

Description Modbus DeviceNet PROFIBUS 

Operating Voltage Range—DC Input Modules 

OFF state 0–6 Vdc 0–6 Vdc 0–6 Vdc 

Transition region 6–18 Vdc 6–18 Vdc 6–18 Vdc 

ON state 18–30 Vdc 18–30 Vdc 18–30 Vdc 

C441_ 120 Vac Input 

Nominal input voltage 120 Vac 120 Vac 120 Vac 

Operating voltage 80–140 Vac 80–140 Vac 80–140 Vac 

Number of inputs 4 4 4 

OFF-state voltage 70 Vac 

Nominal input current 15 mA 15 mA 15 mA 

Signal delay 1/2 cycle 1/2 cycle 1/2 cycle 

Isolation 1500V 1500V 1500V 

Terminal screw torque 7–9 in-lb 7–9 in-lb 7–9 in-lb 

Operating Voltage Range—AC Input Modules 

OFF state 0–30 Vac 0–30 Vac 0–30 Vac 

Transition region 30–80 Vac 30–80 Vac 30–80 Vac 

ON state 80–140 Vac 80–140 Vac 80–140 Vac 

Output Modules 

Nominal voltage 

120 Vac 

120 Vac 

120 Vac 

24 Vdc 

24 Vdc 

24 Vdc 

Number of outputs (2) 1NO Form A 

1NO/NC Form C 

Note 

 

Resistive current at 55°C ambient. 

(2) 1NO Form A 

1NO/NC Form C 

(2) 1NO Form A 

1NO/NC Form C 

Relay OFF time 3 ms 3 ms 3 ms 

Relay ON time 7 ms 7 ms 7 ms 

Max. current per point 5A (B300 rated) 5A (B300 rated) 5A (B300 rated) 

Electrical life 100,000 cycles 100,000 cycles 100,000 cycles 

Mechanical life 1,000,000 cycles 1,000,000 cycles 1,000,000 cycles 




33.1 

Short Circuit Ratings (North America CSA, cUL) 

Changes to UL 508A and NEC in recent years have brought a focus to control panel safety with 

regard to short-circuit current ratings (SCCR). Eaton’s C440 electronic overload relays combined 

with XT series IEC and Freedom Series NEMA contactors provide a wide variety of SCCR 

solutions needed for a variety of applications. The SCCR data in this document reflects the 

latest information as of April 2010. 

C440/XT Standalone Overload Relays (XT, C440) 

Standard-Fault Short Circuit Data 

Overload 

FLA Range 

Maximum 

Operating 

Voltage 

600V (kA) 

Maximum 

Fuse Size (A) 

(RK5) 

Maximum 

Breaker 

Size (A) 

High-Fault Short Circuit Data 

Fuses (RK5, J, CC) 

Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers 

Maximum 

Maximum 

480V (kA) 600V (kA) Fuse Size 480V (kA) 600V (kA) Breaker Size 

0.33–1.65A 600 Vac 1 6 15 — — — — — — 

1–5A 600 Vac 5 20 20 100 100 30 100 35 20 

4–20A 600 Vac 5 80 80 100 100 100 100 35 80 

9–45A 600 Vac 5 175 175 100 100 100 100 35 100/175 (480/600) 

20–100A 600 Vac 10 400 400 100 100 200 150 35 250/400 (480/600) 

NEMA Freedom Series Starters with C440 Electronic Overload Relays 

Maximum High-Fault Short Circuit Data 



Operating Fuses (RK5, J, CC) 

Maximum 

Maximum 

Size 

Voltage 480V 600V Fuse Size 480V 600V Breaker Size 

00 0.33–1.65A 100 100 30 — — — 

1–5A 100 100 30 100 35 35 

4–20A 100 100 30 100 35 35 

0 0.33–1.65A 100 100 60 — — — 

1–5A 100 100 60 100 35 70 

4–20A 100 100 60 100 35 70 

1 0.33–1.65A 100 100 100 — — — 

1–5A 100 100 100 100 35 100 

4–20A 100 100 100 100 35 100 

9–45A 100 100 100 100 35 100 

2 1–5A 100 100 100 100 35 175 

4–20A 100 100 100 100 35 175 

9–45A 100 100 100 100 35 175 

3 20–100A 100 100 200 50 50 250 

IEC XT Starters with XT Electronic Overload Relays 

Maximum High-Fault Short Circuit Data 

Contactor Operating Fuses (RK5, J, CC) 

Maximum 

Frame Size Voltage 480V 

600V 

Fuse Size 480V 600V 


B 1–5A 100 100 30 — — — 

4–20A 100 100 30 — — — 

C 1–5A 100 100 60 — — — 

4–20A 100 100 60 — — — 

9–45A 100 100 60 — — — 

D 9–45A 100 100 200 65 35 175 

20–100A 100 100 200 65 35 175 

F 20–100A 100 100 200 65 65 350 

G 20–100A 100 100 200 65 65 350 

Maximum 

Breaker Size 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.1 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Dimensions 


NEMA Starters 

Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starters 

B 

E 

A 

D 

RESET 

A 

E 

B 

Sizes 00, 0 

Size 3 

C 

Text 

Orientation 

C 

Text 

Orientation 

NEMA Size A B C D E 

00, 0 1.97 (50.0) 6.60 (167.6) 4.90 (124.5) — 6.18 (157.0) 

1, 2 2.60 (65.0) 7.10 (180.0) 4.98 (126.5) 2.00 (50.8) 6.50 (165.0) 

3 4.09 (103.8) 11.40 (289.6) 5.92 (150.3) 1.77 (44.9) 10.81 (274.6) 

5 7.00 (177.8) 17.81 (452.3) 8.08 (205.2) 6.00 (152.4) 16.01 (406.6) 

D 

A 

RESET 

A 

D 

E 

B 

Sizes 1, 2 

E 

B 

Size 5 

C 

Text 

Orientation 

Text 

Orientation 

C 




33.1 


Full Voltage Reversing Starters 

A 

D 

D 

A 

D 

A 

B 

E 

Sizes 00, 0 

B 

E 

Size 2 

E 

Size 5 

C 

C 

Text 

Orientation 

Text 

Orientation 

C 

B 

NEMA Size A B C D E 

00, 0 5.20 (132.0) 7.40 (187.0) 4.90 (125.0) 3.50 (89.0) 6.90 (174.0) 

1 6.70 (171.0) 7.10 (180.0) 4.98 (126.5) 5.25 (133.0) 5.70 (144.0) 

2 6.70 (171.0) 8.10 (205.0) 4.98 (126.5) 5.25 (133.0) 6.70 (170.0) 

3 8.08 (205.2) 11.35 (288.3) 6.00 (152.0) 7.00 (177.8) 10.77 (273.6) 

5 14.50 (368.3) 17.81 (452.3) 8.06 (204.8) 13.50 (342.9) 16.00 (406.6) 

B 

E 

RESET 

D 

A 

D 

A 

B 

E 

Size 1 

Size 3 

C 

Text 

Orientation 

C 

Text 

Orientation 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 




Class A201 Contactors, 

Sizes 00–4; Three-Phase, 

1-1/2–100 hp 

A201 Magnetic Contactors 

from Eaton’s electrical sector 

are 600V rated devices 

available in NEMA Sizes 00– 

4, 10A through 150A (open 

rating). Product features 

include: 

● 

● 

● 

● 

Straight-through wiring 

to line and load terminals 

located up front for ease 

of installation 

Moving and stationary 

contacts are front 

accessible, simplifying 

inspection and 

maintenance 

Reliable U-shaped magnet 

for reduced power 

consumption 

Coil design reduces 

inventory/maintenance 

expenses. For a given 

voltage, one size coil fits 

all contactors Sizes 00–2, 

and a second coil fits 

three-pole Model J Sizes 3 

and 4. Model K coils are 

different design 

A201 contactors have 

normally open holding circuit 

interlocks which are supplied 

as standard. 

Panel layout and drilling are 

simplified through the use 

of common backplates, one 

for Sizes 00–2 and one for 

Sizes 3–4. In addition, panel 

space is reduced dramatically 

through the use of unique 

corner cavities for mounting 

the wide variety of 

modifications shown on 

Page 83. 

For reversing applications, 

two contactors are supplied 

on a common base with 

electrical and mechanical 

interlocks which prevent both 

contactors from being closed 

at the same time. 

Class A201 Contactors, 

Sizes 5–9; Three-Phase, 

Over 100 hp 

These AC magnetic 

contactors utilize clapper 

design and feature straightthrough 

wiring. 

Contacts are silver alloy for 

longer life. The contacts close 

with optimum wiping action 

which serves to keep the 

contacting surfaces clean. 

De-ion® arc quenchers draw 

the arc away from the 

contacts at opening, which 

reduces burning and pitting 

and increases contact life. 

All of the contactors are 

complete with one unwired, 

normally-open (NO) auxiliary 

contact mounted and have 

Contents 

Description 

Page 

A200 Series 

Contactors—Non-Reversing and Reversing . . . . . . . . . . 64 

Starters—Non-Reversing and Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 

Relays—Thermal and Fast Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 

Thermal Type B, Class 20, Manual Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 

Thermal Type A, Class 20, Auto/Manual Reset. . . . . . . . 96 

Type FT Fast Trip, Class 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 

Heater Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 

Relays—Current Sensing Protective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 

accommodations for 

additional auxiliary contacts. 

No control circuit wiring or 

terminal markings are included. 

Size 5, 300A, 600V, Open 


Class A201 Size 5 and 6 

contactors are front clapper 

design, AC operated with the 

armature pivoting on dual 

needle bearings which assure 

accurate contact alignment. 

The contactor base is molded 

of a high impact, nontracking, 

non-hygroscopic 

glass polyester material 

permitting front mounting 

and wiring on a steel panel. 

Floating magnet assures 

quiet operation. 

Size 5 and 6 contactors must 

be mounted with the line 

terminals directly above the 

load terminals. 

Multi-voltage coil ratings 

allow selection of the voltage 

which closely matches the 

actual system voltage to assure 

optimum contactor operation. 

Each contactor 

accommodates two Type J11 

auxiliary contacts, providing 

up to four auxiliary circuits, 

normally-open or normallyclosed 

(NO and NC). 

A201 Size 5 and 6 

contactors and starters are 

UL recognized when supplied 

without terminals. When 

supplied with terminals, the 

devices are UL listed. 

Two special configurations of 

the Class A201 Size 5 and 6 

contactors are available: 

● 

● 

Latched Design— 

This is a mechanically 

held, electrically released 

device. It is applied where 

the contactor must remain 

closed during extreme 

voltage fluctuations or 

power failure. It is also 

suitable for applications 

requiring quiet operation 

since the operating coil is 

de-energized when the 

contactor is closed. The 

latch assembly consists 

of a mechanical latch 

mechanism, electrically 

operated AC trip solenoid 

and a clearing contact 

DC Operated—This device 

is DC operated. It is used 

where low dropout voltage 

or exceptionally quiet 

operation is desired. The 

DC assembly consists of a 

DC operating coil, integrally 

mounted rectifier and 

shorting contact 



A200 Series 

33.2 


Size 8, 1350A, 600V, Open 

Size 9, 2500A, 600V, Open 

Class A201 Size 7 and 8 

contactors are DC operated 

side clapper design with the 

shaft mounted on dual needle 

bearings to ensure positive 

contact alignment and long 

contact life. 

A steel panel base permits 

mounting on angle or channel 

without additional support, 

for versatile low cost 

installation. 

Each stationary contact 

assembly is mounted on an 

individual molded insulator. 

Each pair of contacts is 

surrounded by a De-ion grid 

type arc quencher for rapid 

and confined arc interruption 

and long contact life. 

The shunt for each pole is 

made of flexible, braided 

copper cable for freedom of 

movement and long life. 

The rugged DC operating 

coils are designed to operate 

at high temperature and 

insulated to meet Class H 

service. 

An integrally mounted 

avalanche type silicon 

rectifier supplies DC coil 

voltage from the AC 

control circuit. 

Sizes 7 and 8 accommodate 

three Type L-63 auxiliary 

contacts which are easily 

converted from normallyopen 

to normally-closed, 

providing auxiliary circuit 

flexibility. Size 9 uses L-64 

auxiliary contacts with a total 

of four circuits. 

A201 Size 7, 8 and 9 

contactors and starters are 

UL recognized when supplied 

without terminals. When 

supplied with terminals, the 

devices are UL listed. 

Application Description 

Magnetic contactors are 

used to switch transformers 

and capacitors and to control 

electrical power circuits 

such as heating, lighting 

and motors that require 

no overload protection, or 

where overload protection 

is separately provided. They 

can be operated remotely 

by manual or automatic 

pilot devices. 


A201 contactors are UL listed 

components and also have 

CSA certification. 

Instructional Leaflets 

16960B Sizes 00–1 Magnetic 

Contactor, 

Non-reversing 

or Reversing 

16961E Size 2 Magnetic 

Contactor, 

Non-reversing 

or Reversing 

13238G Size 3 Magnetic 

Contactor, 

Non-reversing 

or Reversing 

17001C Size 4 Magnetic 

Contactor, 

Non-reversing 

or Reversing 

17049D Size 5 Magnetic 

Contactor, 

Non-reversing 

or Reversing 

17053B Size 6 Magnetic 

Contactor, 

Non-reversing 

or Reversing 

17048 Sizes 7–8 Magnetic 

Contactor, 

Non-reversing 

or Reversing 

16978 Size 9 Magnetic 

Contactor, 

Non-reversing 

or Reversing 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


Non-Reversing, Sizes 00–9 


Order by catalog number from the table below, plus suffix for 

coil voltages, verifying usage of appropriate sizes. 

A201 Size 1 Contactor 

Front Connected Contactors 

Size 

Amps 

Max. UL Horsepower Two Poles Open Three Poles Open Four Poles Open Five Poles Open 

Single-Phase Three-Phase Catalog Catalog 

Catalog 

Catalog 

115V 230V 208V 240V 480V 600V Number Number 

Number 

Number 

Sizes 00–6 

00 9 1/3 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 A201KAB_ A201KAC_ A201KAD_ A201KAE_ 

0 18 1 2 3 3 5 5 A201K0B_ A201K0C_ A201K0D_ A201K0E_ 

1 27 2 3 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 A201K1B_ A201K1C_ A201K1D_ A201K1E_ 

2 45 3 7-1/2 10 15 25 25 A201K2B_ A201K2C_ A201K2D_ A201K2E_ 

3 90 — — 25 30 50 50 A201K3B_ A201K3C_ A201K3D_ A201K3E_ 

4 135 — — 40 50 100 100 A201K4B_ A201K4C_ A201K4D_ A201K4E_ 

5 270 — — 75 100 200 200 A201K5B_ A201K5C_ — — 

6 540 — — 150 200 400 400 A201K6B_ A201K6C_ — — 

Sizes 7–9 

7 810 — — 200 300 600 600 A201K7B_ A201K7C_ — — 

8 1215 — — 400 450 900 900 A201K8B_ A201K8C_ — — 

9 2250 — — — 800 1600 — A201K9B_ A201K9C_Z1 — — 

Rear Connected Contactors 

120V Rectified Coil/Open Only 

Size 


7 A201K7CJZ1Z4 



Coil Suffix 

Coil Volts and Hz 

Code Suffix 

Sizes 00–6 

120/60 or 110/50 A 

200–208/60 B 

240/60 W 

Sizes 7, 8 and 9 

480/60 X 

600/60 E 

110–120/50 or 60 J 

220–240/50 or 60 K 

440–480/50 or 60 U 

600/60 E 

Notes 

 

Sizes 7–9 use rectifier with DC coil. 

 

For Size 9, only available coil voltage is 120V. 

 

Supplied without terminal lugs. 



A200 Series 

33.2 

Reversing, Sizes 00–9 


Order by catalog number from the table below, plus suffix for 

coil voltages, verifying usage of appropriate sizes. 

Size 1 Horizontal 

Reversing Contactor 

Class A211—Horizontally Mounted and Class A251—Vertically Mounted Reversing Contactors 

Size 

Coil Suffix 


Code Suffix 

Sizes 00–6 

120/60 or 110/50 A 

200–208/60 B 

240/60 W 

480/60 X 

600/60 E 


110–120/50 or 60 J 

220 –240/50 or 60 K 

440–480/50 or 60 U 

600/60 E 

Notes 

Amps 

 


 


Max. UL Horsepower Horizontal Design Vertical Design 

Single-Phase Three-Phase Catalog 

Catalog 

115V 230V 208V 240V 480V 600V Number 

Number 

Sizes 0 –6 

0 18 1 2 3 3 5 5 A211K0C_ A251K0C_ 

1 27 2 3 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 A211K1C_ A251K1C_ 

2 45 3 7-1/2 10 15 25 25 A211K2C_ A251K2C_ 

3 90 — — 25 30 50 50 A211K3C_ A251K3C_ 

4 135 — — 40 50 100 100 A211K4C_ A251K4C_ 

5 270 — — 75 100 200 200 A211K5C_ A251K5C_ 

6 540 — — 150 200 400 400 A211K6C_ A251K6C_ 

Sizes 7–9 

7 810 — — 200 300 600 600 — A251K7C_ 

8 1215 — — 400 450 900 900 — A251K8C_ 

9 2250 — — — 800 1600 — — A251K9C_ 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Dimensions 


Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved. 

Non-Reversing Open Contactors 

Figure A—Sizes 00–4 A210 

F 

A 

E 

2 G 

0.20 (5.1) 4 

E Mounting Slots 

Figure C—Size 6 

0.12 

(3.0) 

C 

0.22 (5.6) 

Dia. Hole 

D 

B 

0.38 x 0.5 (9.7 x 12.7) 

2 Mounting Slots 

E 

C 

E 

2 

A 

H 

G 

D 

B 

Figure B—Size 5 

Figure D—Sizes 7–9 


NEMA No. of Mounting Screws 

Size Poles Fig. No. Size A B C D E F G H 

0.12 

(3.0) 

0.38 x 0.5 (9.7 x 12.7) 


C 

0.38 (9.7) Dia. Open End 

Mounting Slot 

(2 Places) 

C 

B 

E 

2 

E 

A 

A 

E 

H 

G 

D 

4 Holes for 0.38 (9.7) Dia. 

Mounting Hardware 

B 

H 

G 

D 

Weight, 

Lbs (kg) 

00, 0, 1 2–4 A 3 #10 3.31 (84.1) 4.38 (111.3) 4.61 (117.1) 3.95 (100.3) 1.50 (38.1) 1.66 (42.2) 0.23 (5.8) — 2.6 (1.2) 

5 A 3 #10 4.19 (106.4) 4.38 (111.3) 4.61 (117.1) 3.95 (100.3) 1.50 (38.1) 2.09 (53.1) 0.23 (5.8) — 3.2 (1.5) 

2 2, 3 A 3 #10 3.31 (84.1) 4.38 (111.3) 4.94 (125.5) 3.95 (100.3) 1.50 (38.1) 1.66 (42.2) 0.23 (5.8) — 3.3 (1.5) 

4, 5 A 3 #10 5.06 (128.5) 4.38 (111.3) 4.94 (125.5) 3.95 (100.3) 1.50 (38.1) 2.53 (64.3) 0.23 (5.8) — 4.5 (2.0) 

3, 4 2, 3 A 3 1/4 in. 4.63 (117.6) 6.63 (168.4) 6.75 (171.5) 6.00 (152.4) 1.88 (47.8) 2.31 (58.7) 0.38 (9.7) — 9.3 (4.2) 

4, 5 A 3 1/4 in. 7.25 (184.2) 6.63 (168.4) 6.75 (171.5) 6.00 (152.4) 1.88 (47.8) 3.63 (92.2) 0.38 (9.7) — 13.0 (5.9) 

5 2, 3 B 4 3/8 in. 7.22 (183.4) 12.00 (304.8) 7.75 (196.9) 11.00 (279.4) 2.75 (69.9) — 0.59 (15.0) 2.22 (56.4) 25.0 (11.4) 

6 2, 3 C 4 3/8 in. 7.22 (183.4) 13.50 (342.9) 9.50 (251.3) 11.00 (279.4) 2.75 (69.9) — 0.59 (15.0) 2.22 (56.4) 42.0 (19.1) 

7 3 D 4 3/8 in. 23.50 (596.9) 18.63 (473.2) 11.00 (279.4) 12.00 (304.8) 22.00 (558.8) — 5.63 (143.0) 0.75 (19.1) 215.0 (97.6) 

8 3 D 4 3/8 in. 23.50 (596.9) 19.25 (489.0) 11.00 (279.4) 12.00 (304.8) 22.00 (558.8) — 5.63 (143.0) 0.75 (19.1) 265.0 (120.3) 

9 3 D 4 1/2 in. 33.00 (838.2) 29.75 (755.7) 12.94 (328.7) 8.00 (203.2) 30.75 (781.1) — 14.50 (368.3) 1.63 (41.4) 315.0 (143.0) 



A200 Series 

33.2 



Reversing Open Contactors 

Figure A—Sizes 00–4 Horizontal 

F 

A 

E 

Figure C—Sizes 5, 6 Horizontal 

Figure B—Sizes 00–4 Vertical Figure D—Sizes 5, 6 Vertical Figure E—Sizes 7–9 Vertical 



Size 

H 

0.20 (5.1) 

Dia. 

3 Mtg. 

Holes 

No. of 

Poles 

G 

D 

B 

E 

2 0.20 (5.1) Dia. 

3 Mounting 

Slots 

A 

F 

Fig. 

G 

D B 

C 

C 

C 

E 

C 

E 

2 

F E H 

A 

Mounting Screws 

No. Size A B C D E F G H 

G 

D 

B 

Weight, 

Lbs (kg) 

00, 0, 1 3 x 3 H. A 3 #10 7.13 (181.1) 4.45 (113.0) 5.05 (128.3) 3.95 (100.3) 5.31 (134.9) 3.56 (90.4) 0.25 (6.4) — 7.8 (3.5) 

3 x 3 V. B 3 #10 3.33 (84.6) 9.61 (244.1) 5.05 (128.3) 9.08 (230.6) 2.16 (54.9) 0.75 (19.1) 0.25 (6.4) 4.52 (114.8) 8.9 (4.0) 

2 3 x 3 H. A 3 #10 7.13 (181.1) 4.45 (113.0) 5.38 (136.7) 3.95 (100.3) 5.31 (134.9) 3.56 (90.4) 0.25 (6.4) — 9.1 (4.1) 

3 x 3 V. B 3 #10 3.33 (84.6) 9.61 (244.1) 5.38 (136.7) 9.08 (230.6) 2.16 (54.9) 0.75 (19.1) 0.25 (6.4) 4.52 (114.8) 10.0 (4.5) 

3, 4 3 x 3 H. A 3 1/4 in. 9.75 (247.7) 6.88 (174.8) 7.25 (184.2) 6.00 (152.4) 7.00 (177.8) 4.88 (124.0) 0.44 (11.2) — 24.0 (10.9) 

3 x 3 V. B 3 1/4 in. 4.63 (117.6) 16.56 (420.6) 7.25 (184.2) 15.69 (398.5) 2.75 (69.9) 0.94 (23.9) 0.44 (11.2) 7.78 (197.6) 25.0 (11.4) 

5 3 x 3 H. C 8 3/8 in. 17.22 (437.4) 12.00 (304.8) 7.75 (196.9) 11.00 (279.4) 2.75 (69.9) 10.00 (254.0 0.59 (15.0) 1.38 (35.1) 55.0 (25.0) 

3 x 3 V. D 8 3/8 in. 8.25 (209.6) 30.00 (762.0) 7.75 (196.9) 18.00 (457.8) 2.75 (69.9) — — 1.38 (35.1) 55.0 (25.0) 

6 3 x 3 H. C 8 3/8 in. 17.22 (437.4) 13.50 (342.9) 8.75 (222.3) 11.00 (279.4) 2.75 (69.9) 10.00 (254.0) 0.59 (15.0) 1.38 (35.1) 90.0 (40.9) 

3 x 3 V. D 8 3/8 in. 8.25 (209.6) 41.50 (1054.1) 8.75 (222.3) 28.00 (711.2) 2.75 (69.9) — — 1.38 (35.1) 90.0 (40.9) 

7 3 x 3 V. E 8 3/8 in. 23.50 (596.9) 38.63 (981.2) 11.00 (279.4) 20.00 (508.0) 22.00 (558.8) — 5.63 (143.0) 0.75 (19.1) 450.0 (204.3) 

8 3 x 3 V. E 8 3/8 in. 23.50 (596.9) 39.25 (997.0) 11.00 (279.4) 20.00 (508.0) 22.00 (558.8) — 5.63 (143.0) 0.75 (19.1) 550.0 (249.7) 

9 3 x 3 V. E 8 1/2 in. 33.00 (838.2) 62.75 (1593.9) 12.94 (328.7) 33.00 (838.2) 30.75 (781.1) — 14.50 (368.3) 1.63 (41.4) 650.0 (295.1) 

E 

2 

A 

H 

D 

B 

C 

0.53 (13.5) Dia.—3 Holes 

A 

E 

H 

G 

D 

B 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Starters—Non-Reversing and Reversing 



NEMA Sizes 00–4; Three-Phase, 

1-1/2–100 hp 

These Starters from 

Eaton’s electrical sector 

use Class A201 contactors 

as described on Page 64. 

Contactor features are 

enhanced through the ability 

to provide positive motor 

protection in the form of 

several types of overload 

relays. See Pages 91–103. 

Type B Overload Relay, 

Manual Reset Only 

Supplied as standard on 

Class A200 and A900 starters 

(two-speed). The bi-metallic 

overload relay offers ambient 

compensation and trip-to-test 

feature (relay contact status 

check) as standard. In 

addition, an isolated normallyopen 

contact is available in kit 

form for customer mounting. 

Type B overload relays are 

manual reset only. 

Type A Overload Relay, 

Manual or Automatic Reset 

This is an optional overload 

relay, offering the capability 

of field conversion to 

automatic reset. It is available 

as an ambient compensated 

or non-compensated type. 

Non-Reversing Starters 

Non-reversing starters are 

supplied as open devices. All 

starters are supplied with a 

normally-open holding circuit 

interlock. 

Reversing Starters 

For reversing applications 

(Class A210), a starter and a 

contactor electrically and 

mechanically interlocked are 

supplied on a common 

baseplate. Reversing starters 

are used to start, stop and 

reverse AC squirrel cage 

motors and for primary 

control of reversing woundrotor 

motors. 

For plugging or inching, when 

operations exceed five times 

per minute, decreased 

horsepower ratings in 

accordance with NEMA 

Standard ICS 2-321 are 

recommended. 

Two-Speed Starters, A900s 

For across-the-line starting of 

two-speed constant hp, 

constant torque and variable 

Contents 

Description 

Page 



Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 

Features and Benefits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 


Instructional Leaflets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 


Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 

Renewal Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 

Accessories and Field Modification Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 


Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 

Relays—Thermal and Fast Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 

Thermal Type B, Class 20, Manual Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 

Thermal Type A, Class 20, Auto/Manual Reset . . . . . . . . . . 96 

Type FT Fast Trip, Class 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 

Heater Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 

Relays—Current Sensing Protective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 

torque squirrel cage motors, 

two-speed starters (Class 

A900) are available. These 

starters consist of two 

starters, one for each motor 

speed, mechanically and 

electrically interlocked and 

wired for manual speed 

selection by means of 

pushbuttons. Auxiliary relays 

may be added to provide 

automatic acceleration or 

deceleration. 

Starters for two-speed, two 

independent winding motors 

consist of two-, three- or fourpole 

starters electrically and 

mechanically interlocked. 

Starters for two-speed, single 

reconnectable winding 

motors consist of one threepole 

and one five-pole starter 


interlocked. 

NEMA Sizes 5–9; Three-Phase 

75 to 1600 hp 

Non-reversing (Class A200), 

and reversing (Classes A210, 

A250) full voltage starters 

are used for across-the-line 

starting of squirrel cage 

induction motors. They are 

used with motors rated above 

50 hp at 230V, and above 

100 hp at 460 through 600V. 

Sizes 5 and 6 starters use 

Class A201 contactors as 

described on Page 64. In 

addition to standard motor 

starters, special application 

devices are available: Sizes 5 

and 6 starters with integrally 

rectified AC to DC coils for 

applications where low 

voltage problems are 

prevalent are available. 

Front Removable Parts— 

All operating parts can be 

removed quickly and easily 

from the front. Straightthrough 

wiring and 

conveniently located 

connection points for external 

wires and cables minimize 

installation time. 

Type B Block Type 

Thermal Overload Relay— 

Dependable overload 

protection is assured by 

these snap-action, manual 

reset relays. Automatic reset 

Type A relays are available as 

an option. 



A200 Series 

33.2 

Types of Starters 

Class A200, Sizes 5 and 6— 

Non-reversing starters 

contain an AC magneticallyoperated 

Size 5 or Size 6 line 

contactor and block Type B 

three-pole overload relay, 

along with three current 

transformers. A control relay 

whose contacts handle the 

coil current of the starter is 

provided with Size 6 starters. 

Class A200, Sizes 7, 8 

and 9—Non-reversing 

starters contain a DC 

operated line contactor, DC 

power supply, block Type B 

three-pole overload relay with 

three current transformers 

and a control relay. 

Class A960/A970/A980 

Multi-Speed Starters: 

Refer to Page 74. 


Magnetic starters are used 

for full-voltage, across-theline 

starting and stopping of 

squirrel cage motors. They 

can be operated locally or 

remotely by manual or 

automatic pilot devices. 


Sizes 00–4 

● 

Straight-Through Wiring, 

Up-Front, Out-Front 

Terminals for ease in 

installation 

● 

Unique Accessory 

Mounting Cavities reduce 

panel space requirements 

● 

Snap-in Accessories for 

application flexibility 

● Vertical and Horizontal 

Interlocking capability 

increases application 

flexibility 

● 

Ambient Compensated 

Overload Relays available 

as standard, offering 

superior motor protection 

in variable motor/controller 

environments 

● Isolated Normally Open 

Relay Contact available in 

kit mounting form on Type 

B Overload Relay 

Sizes 5–9 

● Rectified AC/DC Coils 

available to reduce 

premature drop-out or 

“kiss” problems due to 

inherent low voltage 

conditions 

● Clapper Design armature 

assembly pivots on needle 

bearings resulting in quick, 

smooth opening and 

closing of the magnet 

● Stainless Steel Kick-Out 

Spring assures quick, 

positive drop-out time 

● Front Removable Parts all 

current carrying parts front 

removable for easy 

inspection and 

maintenance 


Class A200 starters are UL 

listed and recognized and 

also carry CSA certification. 

Instructional Leaflets 

16958 Sizes 00–1, 3-Pole 

Motor Controller 

16956 Sizes 00–1, 2-Pole, 

Single-Phase Motor 

Controller 

16959 Size 2, 3-Pole 


16957 Size 2, 2-Pole, 

Single-Phase 


15465C Sizes 3 and 4J 


17000C Size 4, Model K 


17054C Size 5 


17055C Size 6 


33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


Non-Reversing, Sizes 00–9 


Order by catalog number 

from the tables to the right, 

plus suffix for coil voltages, 

verifying usage of appropriate 

sizes. 

Size 3 Starter 

Non-Reversing Starters 

Size 

Heaters 

Enter heaters as separate 

item by listing catalog 

number from the tables 

on Pages 102 and 103, as 

required per starter. 

Coil Suffix 


Code Suffix 

Sizes 00–6 

120/60 or 110/50 AC 

200–208/60 B 

240/60 W 

480/60 X 

600/60 E 


110–120/50 or 60 J 

220–240/50 or 60 W 

440–480/50 or 60 X 

600/60 E 

Notes 

Amperes 

Max. UL Horsepower 

Single-Phase 

Three-Phase 

115V 230V 208V 240V 480V 600V 

 

For ambient compensated overload relay with auto-reset, add Suffix D. 

 

Single-phase with one single-pole overload relay. 

 


 


Open 


Two-Poles —Sizes 00–2 

00 9 1/3 — 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 A200MABR 

0 18 1 — 3 3 5 5 A200M0BR 

1 27 2 — 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 A200M1BR 

1-1/2 36 3 — — — — — A200MDBR 

2 45 7-12 — 10 15 25 25 A200M2BR 

Three Poles—Sizes 00–6 

00 9 1/3 — 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 A200MAC_ 

0 18 1 — 3 3 5 5 A200M0C_ 

1 27 2 — 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 A200M1C_ 

2 45 7-12 — 10 15 25 25 A200M2C_ 

3 90 — — 25 30 50 50 A200M3C_ 

4 135 — — 40 50 100 100 A200M4C_ 

5 270 — — 75 100 200 200 A200M5C_ 

6 540 — — 150 200 400 400 A200M6C_ 

Three Poles—Sizes 7–9 

7 810 — — 200 300 600 600 A200M7C_ 

8 1215 — — 400 450 900 900 A200M8C_ 

9 2250 — — — 800 1600 — A200M9C_ 



A200 Series 

33.2 

Reversing, Sizes 00–9 


Order by catalog number 

from table below, plus suffix 

for coil voltages, verifying 

usage of appropriate sizes. 

Size 1 Horizontal 

Reversing Starter 

Reversing Starters 

Size 

Heaters 



number from the tables on 

Pages 102 and 103, as 


Coil Suffix 


Code Suffix 

Sizes 00–6 

120/60 or 110/50 AC 

200–208/60 B 

240/60 W 

480/60 X 

600/60 E 


110–120/50 or 60 J 

220–240/50 or 60 W 

440–480/50 or 60 X 

600/60 E 

Notes 

Amps 

Max. UL Horsepower Horizontal Design Vertical Design 

Single-Phase Three-Phase Catalog 

Catalog 

115V 230V 208V 240V 480V 600V Number 

Number 

Sizes 00 –6 

00 9 1/3 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 2 2 A210MAC_ A250MAC_ 

0 18 1 2 3 3 5 5 A210M0C_ A250M0C_ 

1 27 2 3 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 A210M1C_ A250M1C_ 

2 45 3 7-1/2 10 15 25 25 A210M2C_ A250M2C_ 

3 90 — — 25 30 50 50 A210M3C_ A250M3C_ 

4 135 — — 40 50 100 100 A210M4C_ A250M4C_ 

5 270 — — 75 100 200 200 A210M5C_ A250M5C_ 

6 540 — — 150 200 400 400 A210M6C_ A250M6C_ 

Sizes 7–9 

7 810 — — 200 300 600 600 — A250M7C_ 

8 1215 — — 400 450 900 900 — A250M8C_ 

9 2250 — — — 800 1600 — — A250M9C_ 

 


 


 


33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

For Separate Two-Winding Motors 

Heaters 



number from the tables 

on Pages 102 and 103, 

as required per starter. 

For Single-Winding Motors 

Three-Phase, Non-Reversing, Reversing 60 Hz Starters—Heater Selection 


Sizes 0–6 

Coil Suffix 


Coil Suffix 

Sizes 0–6 

120/60 or 110/50 AC 

200–208/60 B 

240/60 W 

480/60 X 

600/60 E 

Note 

Amperes 

Constant Horsepower Constant or Variable Torque Three Poles Open 

208V 240V 480V 600V 208V 240V 480V 600V Catalog Number 

Sizes 0–6 

0 18 3 3 5 5 2 2 3 3 A960M0C_ 

1 27 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 5 5 7-1/2 7-1/2 A960M1C_ 

2 45 10 15 25 25 7-1/2 10 20 20 A960M2C_ 

3 90 25 30 50 50 20 25 40 40 A960M3C_ 

4 135 40 50 100 100 30 40 75 75 A960M4C_ 

5 270 75 100 200 200 60 75 150 150 A960M5C_ 

6 540 150 200 400 400 100 150 300 300 A960M6C_ 

NEMA Amperes 208V 240V 480V 600V 

 


Three Poles Open 



0 18 3 3 5 5 A970M0C_ 

1 27 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 A970M1C_ 

2 45 10 15 25 25 A970M2C_ 

3 90 25 30 50 50 A970M3C_ 

4 135 40 50 100 100 A970M4C_ 

5 270 75 100 200 200 A970M5C_ 

6 540 150 200 400 400 A970M6C_ 


0 18 2 2 3 3 A980M0C_ 

1 27 5 5 7-1/2 7-1/2 A980M1C_ 

2 45 7-1/2 10 20 20 A980M2C_ 

3 90 20 25 40 40 A980M3C_ 

4 135 30 40 75 75 A980M4C_ 

5 270 60 75 150 150 A980M5C_ 

6 540 100 150 300 300 A980M6C_ 



A200 Series 

33.2 

Accessories 

SS-56 Surge Suppressor 

● 

Designed to be used with 

magnetic motor controllers 

through Size 4 in 120V, 

60 Hz control circuit 

applications where 

electronic equipment 

is used 

● 

Steady state coil volts: 

120, 60 Hz, rms 

SS-56 Surge 

Suppressor 

Surge Suppressor 

Type Mounting 

Starter 

Mechanical Interlock 

● Prevents closing of one 

member of a reversing or 

multi-speed contactor until 

the opposite member is 

completely open 

● Lever type mechanism 

assures positive action 

Mechanical Interlock 

Contactor Arrangement 

(Number of Poles, Horizontal or Vertical) 

● 

Peak input volts: 169.6, 

60 Hz, max. amplitude 

● 

Max. ambient 

temperature: 65°C 

● 

Nominal limiting volts: 

270 peak 

● 

Nominal rate of volt rise: 

0.5 per ms 

● 

Kit Catalog Number 

SS-56 

Can be factory assembled 

or field mounted on A200 

and A900 starters and 

contactors 

Continuous 

Size 

Interlock 


3 x 3 horizontal 0, 1 M-33-1B 



All pole combination, vertical 0, 1 M-34-1A 

3 x 3 horizontal reversing 2 M-33-2B 

3 x 3 vertical reversing 2 M-34-2A 

5 x 3 horizontal 2 M-35-2A 

4 x 4 horizontal 2 M-36-2A 

All pole combination horizontal 3, 4 M-33-3B 

All pole combination vertical 3, 4 M-34-3 

F-56 Fuse Block 

● 

Facilitates installation of 

fuses (15A, 600V max.) in 

control circuits 

● 

Utilizes Bussman type KTK 

fuses, or equivalent 

Fuse Block 

Mounting 

Starter 

Panel 

R-56 Interposing Relay 

The R-56AA interposing relay 

is a low energy solid-state 

device with a single NO solidstate 

contact. It can be used 

as a 120 Vac control relay, and 

will operate on as little as 40 

Vac input. Is useful in 

Interposing Relay 

Type Mounting 

Starter or panel 

B3NO Bell Alarm Contact 

● Isolated normally open bell 

alarm contact 

Bell Alarm Contact 


B3NO-2 

B3NO-4 

Control Contact Ratings (B600) 

Maximum Amperes 

AC Volts 

Make 

Overload Relay Reset Extension 

● Used to adjust overload 

reset rod depth of Class 

A200 Model J starters and 

current design overload 

relays to same dimensions 

as obsolete B200 starters 

and overloads identified by 

suffix B, i.e., BA13B 

● 

● 

● 

Mounts in same cavity as 

Type J auxiliary contact 

No tools or mounting 

hardware needed 

Fuse not included 

applications requiring long 

control wiring runs where 

excessive voltage drop would 

prevent the contactor or relay 

from energizing. Will operate a 

Size 4 contactor from 10,000 

feet using 18 AWG wire. 

● 


F56 

F56-P 


R56-AA 

Mounts in Type B blocktype 

overload relay 

Break 

24–120 30 3.00 

121–600 3600 VA 360 VA 

Continuous current rating: 5A 

When replacing obsolete 

B200 device with Class A200 

starter and Type B overload, 

order Style 6710C11H03. 

No charge. 

When replacing obsolete 

B200 device with Class A200 

starter and Type A overload, 

order Style 1490C15H10. 

No charge. 

Notes 

 

Can be used on Sizes 5 and 6 with 120V coil. Mounting bracket required—order separately. 

Mounting bracket 177C043G04. 

 

For Size 3 and 4. 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Power Pole Kit 

● 

Adds 1NO or 1NC power 

pole to Size 00–1 A201 

Class contactors 

● 

Factory installed or field 

mountable in load side 

auxiliary cavities 

● 

● 

600V AC 

Continuous current rating 

of 18A for Size 0, 27A for 

Size 1 

Power Pole Kit 

Continuous Current Rating Kit Size Kit Catalog Number 

Normally Open 

18 0 PNO-0 

27 1 PNO-1 

Normally Closed 

18 0 PNC-0 

27 1 PNC-1 

Replacement Auxiliary Contacts 

Contactor 

Size 

Contact 

Arrangement 

Extra Auxiliary Contact Kits 

All starters include an auxiliary 

contact with 1NO and 1NC 

contact. These kits include an 

auxiliary contact with contacts 

Auxiliary Elect. Contact 

Catalog 

Number 

Style 

Number 

5, 6 1NO + 1NC J11 9084A17G01 

2NO J20 9084A17G02 

2NC J02 9084A17G03 

7, 8 1NO — 578D461G01 

1NC — 578D461G03 

9 1NO + 1NC — 843D943G04 

2NO — 843D943G05 

2NC — 843D943G06 

as shown, plus operating arm 

and mounting bracket when 

required. 

Extra Auxiliary Contact Kits 

Contactor Size Contact Arrangement Style Number 

5, 6 1NO + 1NC 3463D94G18 

2NO 

3463D94G04 

2NC 

3463D94G19 

7, 8 2NO 818D498G06 

1NO 

818D498G04 

DC Coil Conversion Kits 

Kits listed below include all 

necessary parts to convert 

from AC to DC control 

including the DC coil with 

DC Coil Conversion Kits 

Mechanical Interlocks 

Style Numbers 

Contactor Sizes 

Horizontal 

Notes 

 

Do not use with DC operated contactors. 

 

Size 7 and larger use DC coils as standard. 

built-in diode, rectifier, 

auxiliary interlock and all 

mounting hardware. 

Size Voltage Kit Style Number 

5 110-120 7864A28G01 

220-240 7864A28G02 

440-480 7864A28G03 

6 110-120 7864A29G01 

220-240 7864A29G02 

440-480 7864A29G03 

Vertical 

3, 4 and 5 2050A11G75 2050A11G65 

5 and 5 2050A11G27 2050A11G17 

5 and 6 2050A11G26 2050A11G16 

6 and 7, 8 — 2050A11G55 

7, 8 and 7, 8 No (rear conn.) 567D624G01 

7, 8 and 9 No (rear conn.) 9944D56G06 

9 and 9 No (rear conn.) 9944D56G01 



A200 Series 

33.2 

Overload Protection 


Size 5 Starters 

Type B overload relay is a 

three-pole, block type, thermal 

ambient compensated device 

with manual reset mounted 

integrally. Current 

transformers are enclosed in a 

protective case and integrally 

mounted to save panel space. 

Standard ratio is 300:5. 


Size 6 Starters 

Overload protection assembly 

consists of three current 

transformers, Type B threepole 

block overload relay and 

an optional interposing relay. 

These parts are mounted on a 

Overload Relay Kits 

Kit Size 

Kit Part Number 

5 2057A34G01 

6 6379D80G10 

Replacement Terminal Lugs 

Contactor 

Size 

Cable 

Size 

Terminals 

Quantity 

in Kit 

Note 

 

All mounting hardware is included in kit. 

panel which connects 

directly to the load terminal 

of the contactor. Current 

transformers are 600:5 ratio 

as standard. 

If automatic reset is required, 

the Type A, three-pole block, 

ambient compensated relay 

is available upon request. 

Overload Relay Kits 

Each kit includes three 

current transformers 

(standard ratio) and one 

Type B, three-pole block 

overload relay, ambient 

compensated with 

manual reset. 

Quantity Required 

per Pole 

Kit Style 

Number 

5 1-500 MCM 6 2 2119A76G01 

6 2-500 MCM 6 2 7858A96G01 

7 4-500 MCM 12 4 7858A96G02 

8 4-500 MCM 12 4 7858A96G03 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Renewal Parts 


Use this renewal parts data 

to identify device by style 

number, catalog number 

and/or description. 

Select style number of 

replacement part from the 

following pages. 

For clarification of ordering 

procedure, pricing and 

discounts, contact the 

Customer Support Center. 

JF Autostarters 

JF Autostarter Kits 

Frame Size 

Solenoid Assembly with Coil (All Sizes) 

Volt Hz Style Number 

General Information 

This renewal parts data 

will provide the proper 

identification of standard 

parts which may be required 

for maintenance of Eaton’s 

components. 

It is the intent of this catalog 

section to make it possible 

to quickly select the parts 

needed. 

An investment in 

renewal parts and regular 

maintenance program will 

Notes 

 

Kits contain a complete set of moving contacts, stationary contacts and springs. 

 

When replacing solenoid assembly series 416C160 use adapter plate style 9917D02H01— 

one required. 

 

These styles replace coil style 296B892G__. When ordering new style as replacement, 

customer must order adapter plate 9917D02H01, one required. 

protect against downtime 

and ensure a proper duty 

cycle for your equipment. 

To maintain maximum 

operating efficiency and 

dependability of your 

equipment, only genuine 

Eaton replacement parts 

should be used. 

This section identifies the 

replacements parts which 

are available. Order by style 

number. 

Start Contacts Run Contacts Grid Stack Kit 

Required Style Number Required Style Number Required Style Number 

2–3 1 38A7018G12 1 38A7018G13 1 3354D90G10 

4–5 5L 1 550D409G18 1 550D409G19 1 3354D90G10 

5M–5MM 1 3354D90G08 1 3354D90G09 2 3354D90G10 

115 60 5264C05H01 

230 60 5264C05H02 

460 60 5264C05H03 

575 60 5264C05H04 



A200 Series 

33.2 

AC Starters, Contactors A200, A201 

AC Contactors Model J Sizes 00, 0, 1, 2 Kits 

Part 

AC Coils 

DC Coil 

Poles 

Notes 

 

Model C contact tips and coils 00-4, two-, three-, four- and five-pole contactors are same as 

Model J. All other parts are unavailable. 

 

Mounting hardware included. 

 

Use one each of 373B331G11 and 373B331G12. 

 

Two-, three-pole. 

 

Four-, five-pole. 

 

Dual voltage coils. Use only on contactors or starters originally supplied with a dual 

voltage coil. 

 

Use only on contactors originally supplied with a DC coil. 

Size 00 Size 0 Size 1 Size 2 

Style Number Style Number Style Number Style Number 

Contact kit 2 373B331G17 373B331G02 373B331G07 373B331G11 

3 373B331G18 373B331G04 373B331G09 373B331G12 

4 373B331G18 373B331G04 373B331G09 373B331G13 

5 373B331G19 373B331G05 373B331G10 — 

Arc box 2, 3, 4 6714C74G01 6714C74G02 6714C74G03 6714C74G07 

5 6714C74G04 6714C74G05 6714C74G06 6714C74G08 

Cross bar 2, 3 N/A N/A N/A 672B788G32 

4, 5 N/A N/A N/A 672B788G34 

Upper base (for single rated coils only) 2, 3 N/A N/A N/A 672B788G33 

4, 5 N/A N/A N/A 672B788G35 

Lower base 2, 3 N/A N/A N/A 1250C33G09 

4, 5 N/A N/A N/A 1250C33G05 

KO spring (package of 10) All N/A N/A N/A 503C796G01 

Terminal line/load (package of 3) All N/A N/A N/A 371B870G03 

Voltage 

Hz 

Size 00, 0, 1 Size 2 

Two-, Three-, Four-Pole Five-Pole Two-, Three-Pole Four-, Five-Pole 


120/110 60/50 505C806G01 505C808G01 505C806G01 505C818G01 

208 60 505C806G02 505C808G02 505C806G02 505C818G02 

600/550 60/50 505C806G05 505C808G05 505C806G05 505C818G05 

380 50 505C806G07 505C808G07 505C806G07 505C818G07 

240/220 60/50 505C806G12 505C808G12 505C806G12 505C818G12 

480/440 60/50 505C806G13 505C808G13 505C806G13 505C818G13 

24 60 505C806G16 N/A 505C806G16 505C818G15 

277 60 505C806G18 505C808G16 505C806G18 505C818G16 

240/480 60/60 505C806G03 505C808G03 505C806G03 505C818G03 

120/240 60/60 505C806G10 505C808G10 505C806G10 505C818G10 

Voltage 

Size 0, 1 

Single-, Two-, Three-, Four-Pole 

Style Number 

Size 2 

Single-, Two-, Three-Pole 

Style Number 

12 1268C86G07 1268C86G07 

24 1268C86G04 1268C86G04 

48 1268C86G05 1268C86G05 

125 1268C86G02 1268C86G02 

250 1268C86G01 1268C86G01 

125/250 1268C86G03 1268C86G03 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Accessories for Size 5–9 AC Contactors 

A rectifier circuit converts the AC supply to DC supply. This 

conversion provides pick up and drop out characteristics. All 

necessary parts are included in the kit. 

AC-DC Coil Conversion Kits 

Size 5 Size 6 

Voltage 

Style Number 

Style Number 

120 Vac 7864A28G01 7864A29G01 

240 Vac 7864A28G02 7864A29G02 

480 Vac 7864A28G03 7864A29G03 

Replacement Coils for AC-DC Coil Conversion Kit 

Size 5 Size 6 

Voltage 

Style Number 

Style Number 

120 Vac 7856A15G05 7856A16G05 

240 Vac 7856A15G10 7856A16G10 

480 Vac 7856A15G15 7856A16G15 

Auxiliary Electrical Interlocks Size 7–9 AC and All DC Units 

Type Circuits Application Style Number 

L63 NO Size 7–8 578D461G01 

L63 NC Size 7–8 578D461G03 

L64 NO-NC Size 9 843D943G04 

L64 2NO Size 9 843D943G05 

L64 2NC Size 9 843D943G06 

Model J–K, Sizes 3 and 4 

Accessories for Size 00–6 AC Contactors 

Auxiliary Electrical Interlocks 

Catalog 

Number 

(Obsolete) 

Style 

Number 

(Obsolete) 

Circuits 

Catalog 

Number 

Current 

Style 

Number 

Current 

(L-56) (2609D01G01) 1NO and 1NC J11 9084A17G01 

(L-56D) (2609D01G02) 2NO J20 9084A17G02 

(L-56E) (2609D01G03) 1NO and 1NC J11 9084A17G01 

(L-56B) (2609D01G04) 2NO J20 9084A17G02 

(L-56H) (2609D01G05) 2NO J20 9084A17G02 

(L-56J) (2609D01G06) 1NO and1NC DB J1C 9084A17G04 

(L-56A) (2609D01G07) N/A N/A N/A 

(L-56B) (2609D01G08) N/A N/A N/A 

(L-56F) (2609D01G09) N/A N/A N/A 

(L-56G) (2609D01G10) 1NO and 1NC DB J1C 9084A17G04 

(L-56C) (2609D01G11) 2NC J02 9084A17G03 

(L-56M) (2609D01G12) N/A N/A N/A 

(L-56P) (2609D01G17) 1NO and 1NC J11 9084A17G01 

(L-56R) (2609D01G18) 2NC J02 9084A17G03 

(L-56S) (2609D01G19) 1NO and 1NC J11 9084A17G01 

Sizes 3 and 4 Kits 

Size 3–Model J 

Size 4–Model J 

Size 4–Model K 

Part 

Poles 

Style Number 

Style Number 

Style Number 

Contact kit 2 626B187G12 626B187G16 5250C81G16 

3 626B187G13 626B187G17 5250C81G17 

4 

 

5250C81G18 

5 

 

5250C81G19 

Arc box 2, 3 6714C74G09 6714C74G11 6714C74G11 

4, 5 6714C74G10 6714C74G12 6714C74G12 

Cross bar 2, 3 672B788G36 672B788G36 672B788G40 

4, 5 672B788G38 672B788G38 — 

Upper base 2, 3 672B788G37 672B788G37 672B788G52 

4, 5 672B788G39 672B788G39 — 

Lower base 2, 3 1250C33G03 1250C33G03 1250C33G10 

4, 5 1250C33G06 1250C33G06 — 

KO spring (package of 10) All 503C796G02 503C796G02 672B788G50 

Terminal line/load (package of 3) All 372B357G12 372B357G18 372B357G18 

Notes 

 

Model C contact tips and coils 00-4, two-, three-, four- and five-pole contactors are same as Model J. All other parts are unavailable. 

 

For 200A A202 magnetically latched lighting contactors order three-pole contact kit style 672B788G07. 

 

Model K replaces Model J, offering superior design life characteristics. Renewal parts are different. Use parts for proper model only. 

 

Use quantity two of 626B187G12. 

 

Use quantity one each of 626B187G12 and 626B187G13. 

 

Use quantity two of 626B187G16. 

 

Use quantity one each of 626B187G16 and 626B187G17. 



A200 Series 

33.2 

Accessories for Model J–K, Series 3, 4 

DC Coils 

Voltage 

AC Coils 

A201 Contactors—Size 5–9 

Model J Size 3, 4 

Two-, Three-Pole 

Style Number 

24 1255C68G04 

48 1255C68G05 

125 1255C68G01 

250 1255C68G02 

125/250 1255C68G03 

Voltage 

Hz 

GCA 530/630—GPD 7, 8, 9 Kits 

Notes 

 

Use only on units originally supplied with DC coil. 

 

Dual voltage coils. Use only on contactors or starters originally supplied with dual voltage coil. 

 

Model K replaces Model J, offering superior design life characteristics. Renewal parts are 

different. Use parts for proper model only. 

 

Catalog Number A201/A200 Series replaces GCA/GPD series. Renewal parts are the same. 

 

Use 477B477G06 for silver tungsten applications. 

R.C. 

Model J Size 3, 4 

Model K Size 4 

Two-, Three-Pole Four-, Five-Pole Two-, Three-Pole Four-, Five-Pole 


120/110 60/50 505C633G01 505C635G01 5250C79G01 5250C80G01 

208 60 505C633G02 505C635G02 5250C79G02 5250C80G02 

600/550 60/50 505C633G05 505C635G05 5250C79G05 5250C80G05 

380 50 505C633G07 505C635G07 5250C79G07 5250C80G07 

240/220 60/50 505C633G12 505C635G12 5250C79G12 5250C80G12 

480/440 60/50 505C633G13 505C635G13 5250C79G13 5250C80G13 

24 60 505C633G34 N/A 5250C79G34 N/A 

277 60 505C633G14 N/A 5250C79G14 N/A 

240/480 60/60 505C633G03 505C635G03 5250C79G03 5250C80G03 

120/244 60/60 505C633G10 505C635G10 5250C79G10 5250C80G10 

Part 

Size 5 Size 6 Size 7 Size 8 

Size 9 

Style Number Style Number Style Number Style Number Style Number 

Contact kit (one per pole) 477B477G05 2066A10G11 461A757G17 646C829G05 5264C42G01 

5264C42G02 

Arc box 2050A15G45 2066A10G45 831D580G01 831D580G01 9917D69G02 

Magnet assembly 2050A15G46 2050A15G46 N/A N/A N/A 

Mag. spg. kit 2050A15G47 2050A15G47 N/A N/A N/A 

Acr cup kit 2050A15G48 N/A N/A N/A N/A 

Load conversion kit 2050A15G49 2066A10G49 N/A N/A N/A 

Line conversion kit 2050A15G50 2066A10G50 N/A N/A N/A 

K.O. spring–6 2050A15G51 2066A10G46 N/A N/A N/A 

C.T. 300/5 655C285H03 N/A N/A N/A N/A 

C.T. 400/5 655C285H04 N/A N/A N/A N/A 

C.T. 600/5 N/A 2066A10G18 N/A N/A N/A 

C.T. 800/5 N/A 2066A10G19 N/A N/A N/A 

Phase barrier N/A N/A 640C441G01 640C441G01 5264C35G03 

Cross bar 2050A15G12 2066A10G15 N/A N/A N/A 

Shunt N/A 2066A10G48 650C129G01 646C831G02 5264C39G02 

 

 

 

 

F.C. 

C.T. kit which replaces the single molded 1 C.T. assembly used on the old size 6 airbreak. The kit 

includes a single molded 3 C.T. assembly, 2 bus bar and hardware. This C.T. kit also replaces the 

single molded 3 C.T. assembly used on the present size 6 airbreak and size vacuum. 

Set of three. 

Set of four. 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Accessories for A201 Contactors—Size 5–9 

Coils (Sizes 5 and 6) 

Size 5 Size 6 

Voltage 

Hz 

Style Number Style Number 

Sizes 5 and 6 

110/120 60 2050A14G05 2050A12G05 

110/120 50 2050A14G06 2050A12G06 

200/208 50 2050A14G07 2050A12G07 

220/240 50 2050A14G08 2050A12G08 

200/208 60 2050A14G09 2050A12G09 

220/240 60 2050A14G10 2050A12G10 

277/303 60 2050A14G12 2050A12G12 

380/415 50 2050A14G14 2050A12G14 

440/480 60 2050A14G15 2050A12G15 

440/480 50 2050A14G16 2050A12G16 

550/600 60 2050A14G17 2050A12G17 

550/600 50 2050A14G18 2050A12G18 

380/415 60 2050A14G19 2050A12G19 

120/240 60 2050A14G20 2050A12G20 

24 DC — 2050A14G21 2050A12G21 

48 DC — 2050A14G22 2050A12G22 

125 DC — 2050A14G25 2050A12G25 

250 DC — 2050A14G27 2050A12G27 

Coils (Sizes 7–9) 

Line Voltage Style Number Required 


125 Vdc 438C805G04 2 

230 Vdc 438C805G02 2 

250 Vdc 438C805G03 2 

110/120 Vac 438C805G12 2 

220/240 Vac 438C805G11 2 

380 Vac 438C805G15 2 

440/480 Vac 438C805G10 2 

550/575 Vac 438C805G13 2 

Size 9 

110 Vdc 5264C34G01 — 

Notes 

Rectifier 125V 2018A40G01 (one required). 



These coils require an external rectifier. If the rectifier needs replacement, order by the 

appropriate style number. 

 

Contains coil and resistor. 



A200 Series 

33.2 

Modifications 

Factory Modifications 

Modification 

Control circuit 

Overload relays 

(substitutions) 

Catalog NEMA Size 

Description 

Number 

Suffix 00–1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 

1 Extra auxiliary contact (1NO-1NC) non-reversing, J1 Consult sales office for pricing adders. 

reversing, 2-speed unwired 

2 Extra auxiliary contact non-reversing, reversing, J2 Consult sales office for pricing adders. 

2-speed unwired 

3 Extra auxiliary contact non-reversing, unwired J3 Consult sales office for pricing adders. 

4 Extra auxiliary contact non-reversing, unwired J4 Consult sales office for pricing adders. 

Wired for separate control (NC) C Consult sales office for pricing adders. 

Omit control wiring (NC) X Consult sales office for pricing adders. 

Ambient compensated with auto reset (NC) D Consult sales office for pricing adders. 

Fast trip—ambient compensated (specify motor FLA) D7 Consult sales office for pricing adders. 

Overload relay alarm contact (NO) per overload E Consult sales office for pricing adders. 

Accessories and Field Modification Kits 

Type J Auxiliary Contact 

● Capable of being field 

mounted in a contactor or 

starter (Classes A200, 

A900 Sizes 00–6, V200, 

V201 vacuum and definite 

purpose controllers) 

● Provides two separate 

electrical contact sets 

which wire vertically and 

are color coded; black 

designates NC and silver 

designates NO. Please 

Auxiliary Contact Ratings 

Voltage Make Break 

NEMA A600 

120–600 Vac 7200 VA 720 VA 

72–120 Vac 60A 720 VA 

28–72 Vac 60 VA 10A 

NEMA R300 

28–300 Vdc 28 VA 28 VA 

Auxiliary Contact Types 

Contact Type Max. Catalog Number 

1NO and 1NC 4 J11 

2NC 4 J02 

2NO 4 J20 

1 coil clearing NC and 1NO 4 J1C 

● 

● 

note that the vertical wiring 

is contrary to the horizontal 

wiring of the L-56 auxiliary 

contacts 

Designed to fit within 

dimensions of starter; no 

additional panel space is 

required 

Provides circuit isolation 

(no polarity restrictions) 

and single break bifurcated 

contacts 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


Electrical Characteristics 

Sizes 00–4 Sizes 5–9 

Size 00 Size 0 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 

Size 5 Size 6 Size 7 Size 8 Size 9 

Max. voltage rating 600V 600V 600V 600V 600V 600V 

Max. voltage rating 600V 600V 600V 600V 600V 

Ampere rating 

(Open) 10A 20A 30A 50A 100A 150A 

Ampere rating 

(Open) 300A 600A 900A 1350A 2500A 

(Enclosed) 9A 18A 27A 45A 90A 135A 

(Enclosed) 270A 540A 810A 1215A 2250A 

Squirrel Cage Motor 

Maximum horsepower at: 

Squirrel Cage Motor 

Maximum horsepower at: 

200V/60 Hz 1-1/2 hp 3 hp 7-1/2 hp 10 hp 25 hp 40 hp 

200V/60 Hz 75 hp 150 hp — — — 

230V/ 60 Hz 1-1/2 hp 3 hp 7-1/2 hp 15 hp 30 hp 50 hp 

230V/60 Hz 100 hp 200 hp 300 hp 450 hp 800 hp 

380V/50 Hz 1-1/2 hp 5 hp 10 hp 25 hp 50 hp 75 hp 

380V/50 Hz 150 hp 300 hp — — — 

460V–575V/60 Hz 2 hp 5 hp 10 hp 25 hp 50 hp 100 hp 

460V–575V/60 Hz 200 hp 400 hp 600 hp 900 hp 1600 hp 

Resistive Heating kW 

Single-phase, two-pole 

Resistive Heating kW 


120V — — 3 kW 5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 

120V 30 kW 60 kW 90 kW 

 

240V — — 6 kW 10 kW 20 kW 30 kW 

240V 60 kW 120 kW 180 kW 

 

480V — — 12 kW 20 kW 40 kW 60 kW 

480V 120 kW 240 kW 360 kW 

 

600V — — 15 kW 25 kW 50 kW 75 kW 

600V 150 kW 300 kW 450 kW 

 

Three-phase, three-pole 

120V — — 5 kW 8.5 kW 17 kW 26 kW 


120V 52 kW 105 kW 155 kW 

 

240V — — 10 kW 17 kW 34 kW 68 kW 

240V 105 kW 210 kW 315 kW 

 

480V — — 20 kW 34 kW 68 kW 105 kW 

480V 210 kW 415 kW 625 kW 

 

600V — — 25 kW 43 kW 86 kW 130 kW 

600V 260 kW 515 kW 775 kW 

 

Capacitor Switching kVAR, Three-Phase 

Capacitor Switching kVAR, Three-Phase 

240V — — — 12 kVAR 27 kVAR 40 kVAR 240V 80 kVAR 160 kVAR 240 kVAR 360 kVAR 665 kVAR 



Transformer Switching kVA 


Transformer Switching kVA 


120V — 0.6 kVA 1.2 kVA 2.1 kVA 4.1 kVA 6.8 kVA 

120V 14 kVA 27 kVA 41 kVA 61 kVA 112 kVA 

240V — 1.2 kVA 2.4 kVA 4.1 kVA 8.1 kVA 14 kVA 


480V — 2.4 kVA 4.9 kVA 8.3 kVA 16 kVA 27 kVA 


600V — 3 kVA 6.2 kVA 10 kVA 20 kVA 34 kVA 








480V — 4.2 kVA 8.5 kVA 14 kVA 28 kVA 47 kVA 


600V — 5.2 kVA 11 kVA 18 kVA 35 kVA 59 kVA 


Notes 

Resistive loads having inrush currents not exceeding 1.5 times continuous rating. 

These ratings are for transformers having inrush currents not more than 20 times peak of 

continuous current ratings. For inrush currents greater than 20 times, refer to factory. 

 

For ratings refer to factory. 



A200 Series 

33.2 

DC Power Pole Ratings 

The following represent typical production test values and should 

not be interpreted as a guarantee of actual performance. 

DC Operated 120 and 240V Coils 

DC Contact Ampere Rating 

Two Poles in Series 

Contactor Size 

120V 

240V 

0 — — 

1 20 10 

2 45 30 

3 75 40 

4 90 70 

380V, 50 Hz Starter Maximum Horsepower Ratings 

Horsepower Ratings 


Maximum 1-1/2 5 10 25 50 75 150 300 450 700 

horsepower 

Operating Coil Characteristics at Rated Coil Volts, Sizes 00–9 

The following represent typical production test values and should not be interpreted as a guarantee of actual performance. 

Operating Coil Characteristics 

Sizes 00, 0, 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 7 Size 8 Size 9 

AC Coil 

Burden 

(Open VA) 160 VA 160 VA 625 VA 700 VA 1700 VA 2900 VA 

 

(Closed VA) 25 VA 25 VA 50 VA 64 VA 180 VA 220 VA 

 

(Closed Watts) 7.8 W 7.8 W 18 W 21 W 32 W 42 W — — — 

Pick-up volts 85% 85% 85% 85% 78% 70% — — — 

Drop-out volts 40–60% 40–60% 40–60% 40–60% 65 to 75% 60 to 70% — — — 

Pick-up time Hz 1–1-1/2 1-1/2–2 2–2-1/2 1–1-1/2 1.5 4.0 — — — 

Drop-out time Hz 3/4–1 3/4–1 3/4–1 3/4–1 0.75 0.75 — — — 

DC Coil 

Burden 

(Open VA) 17 VA 17 VA 35 VA 35 VA 600 VA 2120 VA 400 VA 400 VA 2100 VA 

(Closed VA) 17 VA 17 VA 35 VA 35 VA 22 VA 21 VA 400 VA 400 VA 350 VA 

(Closed Watts) 18 W 18 W 35 W 35 W 20 W 20 W 400 W 400 W 350 W 

Pick-Up Volts 80% 80% 80% 80% 64% 73% 45%–65% 45%–65% 50%–65% 

Drop-Out Volts 5–10% 5–10% 5–10% 5–10% 18% 13% 30%–45% 30%–45% 40%–50% 

Pick-Up Time Hz — 25–75 ms 25–75 ms 25–75 ms 2.7 Hz 3 Hz 21–41 Hz 17–29 Hz 16–18 

Drop-Out Time Hz — 16–25 ms 16–25 ms 16–25 ms 9.3 Hz 17.5 Hz 7–12 Hz 7–12 Hz 18–20 Hz 

Notes 

 

Non-inductive load. 

 

AC coil data pertains to Model K, DC coil data pertains to Model J. 

 

DC operated only. 

 

Percent of rated coil voltage. 

 

At 60 Hz base. 

 

To contact touch. 

 

Lower figure when coil is cold. Higher figure when coil is hot. 

 

Drop-out time to clear arc. Time varies with type of load and contact wear. 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Mechanical Characteristics 

NEMA Standard ICS 2-110 

Direct-current operated 

contactors shall withstand 

110% of their rated voltage 

continuously without injury to 

the operating coils and shall 

close successfully at 80% of 

their rated voltage. 

Alternating-current operated 

contactors shall withstand 

110% of their rated voltage 

continuously without injury to 

the operating coils and shall 

close successfully at 85% of 

their rated voltage. 

Mechanical Characteristics, Sizes 00–9 

Sizes 00, 0, 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 7 Size 8 Size 9 

Dimensions in inches (mm) 

Height 6.45 (163.8) 7.16 (181.9) 9.93 (252.2) 9.93 (252.2) 12.00 (304.8) 13.50 (342.9) 18.62 (472.9) 19.25 (489) 25.00 (635) 

Width 3.31 (84.1) 3.31 (84.1) 4.62 (117.3) 4.62 (117.3) 7.00 (177.8) 7.00 (177.8) 23.50 (596.9) 23.50 (596.9) 32.00 (812.8) 

Depth 4.61 (117.1) 4.96 (126) 6.75 (171.5) 6.75 (171.5) 7.75 (196.9) 8.75 (222.3) 11.00 (279.4) 11.00 (279.4) 13.00 (330.2) 

Panel area—square inches 21.35 23.7 46.0 46.0 84.0 94.5 437.5 452.4 800 

Weight—pounds 3.5 3.5 11.5 11.5 25 42 215 265 315 

Cable connection — — — — Front Front Front/rear Front/rear Front/rear 

Maximum cable size/phase 6 AWG 3 AWG 1/0 4/0 1–500 MCM 2–500 MCM 3–500 MCM 4–500 MCM 8–500 MCM 

copper (AWG/MCM) 

Auxiliary electrical circuits 8 6 6 6 4 4 3 3 4 

available 

Latched version available Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No 

Mechanical interlock combinations available 

Sizes 

00, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Vert., Horiz. Vert., Horiz. Vert., Horiz. Vert., Horiz. Vert., Horiz. — — — — 

5 — — — — Vert., Horiz. Vert., Horiz. — — — 

6 — — — — Vert., Horiz. Vert., Horiz. Vertical Vertical — 

7, 8 — — — — — Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical 

9 — — — — — — Vertical Vertical Vertical 

Data from Tables 430—147 Through 150 of 1996 NEC: Motor Amperes at Full Load , Three-Phase AC 

Single-Phase Induction Type Squirrel Cage 

Single-Phase Induction Type Squirrel Cage 

AC 

and Wound-Rotor Amperes 

DC 

AC 

and Wound-Rotor Amperes 

DC 

hp 115V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V 120V 240V hp 115V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V 120V 240V 

1/6 4.4 2.2 — — — — — — 30 — — 92 80 40 32 — 106 

1/4 5.8 2.9 — — — — 3.1 1.6 40 — — 120 104 52 41 — 140 

1/3 7.2 3.6 — — — — 4.1 2.0 50 — — 150 130 65 52 — 173 

1/2 9.8 4.9 2.5 2.2 1.1 0.9 5.4 2.7 60 — — 177 154 77 62 — 206 

3/4 13.8 6.9 3.7 3.2 1.6 1.3 7.6 3.8 75 — — 221 192 96 77 — 255 

1 16 8 4.8 4.2 2.1 1.7 9.5 4.7 100 — — 285 248 124 99 — 341 

1-1/2 20 10 6.9 6.0 3.0 2.4 13.2 6.6 125 — — 359 312 156 125 — 425 

2 24 12 7.8 6.8 3.4 2.7 17 8.5 150 — — 414 360 180 144 — 506 

3 34 17 11.0 9.6 4.8 3.9 25 12.2 200 — — 552 480 240 192 — 675 

5 56 28 17.5 15.2 7.6 6.1 40 20 250 — — — — 302 242 — — 

7-1/2 80 40 25.3 22 11 9 58 29 300 — — — — 361 289 — — 

10 100 50 32.2 28 14 11 76 38 350 — — — — 414 336 — — 

15 — — 48.3 42 21 17 — 55 400 — — — — 477 382 — — 

20 — — 62.1 54 27 22 — 72 450 — — — — 515 412 — — 

25 — — 78.2 68 34 27 — 89 500 — — — — 590 472 — — 

Notes 

 

For Sizes 5–9 contactors only; for starter Sizes 5–9, refer to factory. 

 

These current values are for motors running at usual speeds and with normal torque characteristics. Motors for special low speed or high torque may require higher current. In all cases, heaters 

should be selected on basis of information on motor nameplate or motor card data. 



A200 Series 

33.2 

Combination Ratings 


Sizes 00–2 

Other Available Coil Voltages—AC and DC Coils 

Short-Circuit 

Max. Circuit Breaker Short-Circuit 

Short-Circuit 

Max. Circuit Breaker Short-Circuit 

Protective Device Rating Interrupting Withstand Capability 

Protective Device Rating Interrupting Withstand Capability 

(SCPD) 

SCPD Rating 

Current Voltage 

(SCPD) 

SCPD Rating 

Current Voltage 

Sizes 00, 0, 1 

Size 3 

Class H fuse 60A — 5000A 600V 


Class J fuse 60A — 100,000A 600V 


Class R fuse 60A — 100,000A 600V 


Class T fuse 60A — 100,000A 600V 


Magnetic only 30A Marked HMCP 100,000A 480V 


Type CB 50,000A 600V 

Type CB 50,000A 600V 

Thermal/magnetic 50A 65,000A 65,000A 480V 


Type CB 25,000A 25,000A 600V 

Type CB 25,000A 25,000A 600V 

100,000A 100,000A 480V 

100,000A 100,000A 480V 

35,000A 35,000A 600V 

35,000A 35,000A 600V 

Magnetic only 

30A HMCP + current 100,000A 600V 

Magnetic only 


Type CB + CL limiter 




Type CLB Type CLB 

Size 2 

Size 4 


Class H fuse 400A — 10,000A 600V 









Type CB 50,000A 600V 

Type CB 50,000A 600V 



Type CB 25,000A 25,000A 600V 

Type CB 25,000A 25,000A 600V 

100,000A 100,000A 480V 

100,000A 100,000A 480V 

35,000A 35,000A 600V 

35,000A 35,000A 600V 

Magnetic only 


Magnetic only 






Type CLB Type CB + CL 


Type CLB 

Coil Suffix 

Coils 

Catalog 

Number 

Suffix 

Coil Rating 

(Volts/Hertz) 

Catalog 

Number 

Suffix 

Coil Rating 

(Volts/Hertz) 

AC A 120/60, 110/50 N 110/50 

B 200-208/60 P 48/60 

C 240/60 and 480/60 R 120/60 and 240/60 

D 440/50 U 440-480/50 or 60 Rect. to DC 

E 600/60 Hz V 110/60 

G 220/50 W 240/60 

H 380/50 X 480/60 

I 24/60 Y 415/50 

J 110-120/50 or 60 Rect. to DC Z 277/60 

K 220-240/50 or 60 Rect. to DC — — 

DC L 24 Vdc S 125 Vdc 

M 48 Vdc T 250 Vdc 

Notes 

 

Instantaneous adjustable trip. 

 

Circuit breaker. 

 

Inverse time circuit breaker. 

 

Instantaneous adjustable trip with current limiting attachment. 

 

Inverse time with built-in current limiting attachment. 

 

Inverse time current limiting breaker. 

 

Availability may be limited. 

 

DC coils for Size 5 and 6 contactors and starters are intermittent duty rated only. 

A mechanical latch is required. 

 

DC coils. Use only on contactors originally supplied with a DC coil. 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Dimensions 



Open Non-Reversing Starters 

Figure A—Sizes 00–4 

A 

K 

J F M Reset Travel 

E 

2 L 

E 

Figure C—Size 6 

E 

0.38 (9.7) Wide E 

4 Mtg. Slots 2 H 

C A F 

M 



Size 

No. of 

Poles 

Note 

 

Refer to factory. 

G 

B 

Reset 

Rod 

L 

K 

Fig. 

00, 0, 1 2, 3 A 3 #10 3.31 

(84.1) 

2 2, 3 A 3 #10 3.31 

(84.1) 

3, 4 2, 3 A 3 1/4 in. 4.63 

(117.6) 

5 3 B 4 3/8 in. 7.59 

(192.8) 

6 3 C 4 3/8 in. 9.25 

(235.0) 

7 3 

37.88 

(962.2) 

8 3 

 

37.88 

(962.2) 

C 

G 

D 

B 

D 

Figure B—Size 5 

B 

Term. Lug 

Supplied 

When 

Ordered 

0.38 x .5 (9.7 x 12.7) 

(2 Mtg. Slots) 

M 

L 

C 

G 

D 

E 

F 

Reset Rod 

2 

C Cont’r Mtg. 

E H 

L Holes 

A K J 

C L of Cont’r 

Mounting 

Screws 

No. Size A B C D E F G H J K L M 

6.42 

(163.1) 

7.17 

(182.1) 

9.94 

(252.5) 

16.22 

(412.0) 

23.50 

(596.9) 

21.50 

(546.1) 

21.50 

(546.1) 

4.61 

(117.1) 

4.94 

(125.5) 

6.75 

(171.5) 

7.75 

(196.9) 

9.50 

(241.3) 

11.75 

(298.5) 

11.75 

(298.5) 

6.00 

(152.4) 

6.75 

(171.5) 

9.25 

(235.0) 

11.00 

(279.4) 

11.00 

(279.4) 

1.88 

(47.8) 

1.88 

(47.8) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

2.75 

(69.9) 

2.75 

(69.9) 

1.66 

(42.2) 

1.66 

(42.2) 

.94 

(23.9) 

3.81 

(96.8) 

4.81 

(122.2) 

0.23 

(5.8) 

0.23 

(5.8) 

0.38 

(9.7) 

2.69 

(68.3) 

2.75 

(69.9) 

— 0.39 

(9.9) 

— 0.41 

(10.4) 

— 0.55 

(14.0) 

2.42 

(61.5) 

3.06 

(77.7) 

0.33 

(8.4) 

0.59 

(15.0) 

0.77 

(19.6) 

0.80 

(20.3) 

0.33 

(8.4) 

— 6.50 

(165.1) 

4.48 

(113.8) 

4.53 

(115.1) 

6.36 

(161.5) 

7.00 

(177.8) 

8.44 

(214.4) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

— — — — — — — — — — 

— — — — — — — — — — 

9 3 

 

Weight, 

Lbs (kg) 

35.0 

(15.9) 

43.0 

(19.5) 

115.0 

(52.2) 

29.0 

(13.2) 

55.0 

(25.0) 



A200 Series 

33.2 



Open Reversing Starters 

Figure A—Sizes 00–4 Horizontal 

0.28 (7.1) Dia. 

J 

M 

3 Mtg. Holes Reset 

E 

Travel L 



Size 

Number 

of Poles 

Note 

 


F 

A 

Fig. 

00, 0, 1 3 x 3 Horiz. A 3 #10 7.13 

(181.1) 

3 x 3 Vert. B 3 #10 3.33 

(84.6) 

2 3 x 3 Horiz. A 3 #10 7.13 

(181.1) 

3 x 3 Vert. B 3 #10 3.33 

(84.6) 

3, 4 3 x 3 Horiz. A 3 1/4 in. 9.75 

(247.7) 

3 x 3 Vert. B 3 1/4 in. 4.63 

(117.6) 

5 3 x 3 Horiz. — 4 3/8 in. 35.25 

(895.4) 

6 3 x 3 Horiz. — 4 3/8 in. 35.25 

(895.4) 

G 

D 

K 

C 

B 

Figure B—Sizes 00–4 Vertical 

G 

B D 

N 

J 

F 

A 

E 

0.28 (7.1) Dia. 

3 Mtg. Holes 

K 

Reset Travel 

Mounting 

Screws 

No. Size A B C D E F G J K L M N 

6.50 

(165.1) 

11.63 

(295.4) 

7.25 

(184.2) 

12.38 

(314.5) 

10.13 

(257.3) 

19.81 

(503.2) 

25.50 

(647.7) 

25.50 

(647.7) 

5.05 

(128.3) 

5.05 

(128.3) 

5.38 

(136.7) 

5.38 

(136.7) 

7.25 

(184.2) 

7.25 

(184.2) 

8.75 

(222.3) 

10.50 

(266.7) 

6.00 

(152.4) 

11.13 

(282.7) 

6.75 

(171.5) 

11.88 

(301.8) 

9.25 

(235.0) 

18.94 

(481.1) 

5.69 

(144.5) 

1.88 

(47.8) 

5.69 

(144.5) 

1.88 

(47.8) 

8.00 

(203.2) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

3.56 

(90.4) 

1.66 

(42.2) 

3.56 

(90.4) 

1.66 

(42.2) 

4.88 

(124.0) 

2.94 

(74.7) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

0.44 

(11.2) 

0.44 

(11.2) 

2.3 

(58.4) 

0.39 

(9.9) 

2.31 

(58.7) 

0.39 

(9.9) 

3.11 

(79.0) 

0.55 

(14.0) 

0.59 

(15.0) 

0.59 

(15.0) 

0.77 

(19.6) 

0.77 

(19.6) 

0.80 

(20.3) 

0.80 

(20.3) 

4.92 

(125.0 

4.92 

(125.0) 

4.97 

(126.2) 

4.97 

(126.2) 

6.86 

(174.2) 

6.86 

(174.2) 

M 

C 

L 

0.27 

(6.9) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

Weight, 

Lbs (kg) 

— 9.0 

(4.0) 

4.52 

(114.8) 

9.8 

(4.4) 

— 10.8 

4.9) 

4.52 

(114.8) 

12.2 

(5.5) 

— 26.0 

(11.8) 

7.91 

(200.9) 

28.0 

(12.7) 

— — — — — — — — — 73.0 

(33.1) 

— — — — — — — — — 127.0 

(57.7) 

7 

 

8 

9 

 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 



Open Multi-Speed Starters 

Figure A—Sizes 00–4 

Figure B—Sizes 2 



Size 

J 

Number 

of 

Poles 

A 

N 

J 

R 

E 

A 

Fig. 

Mounting 

Screws 

00, 0, 1 3 x 3 Horiz. A 3 #10 7.13 

(181.1) 

5 x 3 Horiz. B 3 #10 8.00 

(203.2) 

2 3 x 3 Horiz. A 3 #10 7.13 

(181.1) 

5 x 3 Horiz. B 3 #10 8.88 

(225.6) 

3, 4 3 x 3 Horiz. A 3 1/4 in. 9.75 

(247.7) 

5 x 3 Horiz. B 3 1/4 in. 12.38 

(314.5) 

F 

E 

No. Size A B C D E F G J K L M N P R 

6.50 

(165.1) 

6.50 

(165.1) 

7.25 

(184.2) 

7.25 

(184.2) 

10.13 

(257.3) 

5.05 

(128.3) 

5.05 

(128.3) 

5.38 

(136.7) 

5.38 

(136.7) 

7.25 

(184.2) 

7.25 

(184.2) 

Notes 

Three-pole x three-pole devices are for Wye-Wye two-winding motors only. 


G 

D 

K 

0.2 (5.1) Dia. 


G 

D 

K 

10.13 

(257.3) 

M 

0.2 (5.1) Dia. 


M 

C 

Reset Travel 

L 

6.00 

(152.4) 

6.00 

(152.4) 

6.75 

(171.5) 

6.75 

(171.5) 

9.25 

(235.0) 

9.25 

(235.0) 

5.69 

(144.5) 

6.53 

(165.9) 

5.69 

(144.5) 

6.56 

(166.6) 

8.00 

(203.2) 

9.31 

(236.5) 

3.56 

(90.4) 

3.56 

(90.4) 

3.56 

(90.4) 

3.56 

(90.4) 

4.88 

(124.0) 

4.88 

(124.0) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

0.44 

(11.2) 

0.44 

(11.2) 

2.30 

(58.4) 

2.30 

(58.4) 

2.69 

(68.3) 

2.69 

(68.3) 

3.11 

(79.0) 

3.11 

(79.0) 

0.33 

(8.4) 

0.48 

(12.2) 

0.69 

(17.5) 

0.69 

(17.5) 

0.80 

(20.3) 

0.80 

(20.3) 

4.92 

(125.0) 

4.92 

(125.0) 

4.97 

(126.2) 

4.97 

(126.2) 

6.86 

(174.2) 

6.86 

(174.2) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

0.27 

(6.9) 

3.81 

(96.8) 

4.66 

(118.4) 

3.81 

(96.8) 

4.66 

(118.4) 

5.13 

(130.3) 

6.44 

(163.6) 

— 2.91 

(73.9) 

— 2.91 

(73.9) 

— 2.91 

(73.9) 

— 2.84 

(72.1) 

— 4.00 

(101.6) 

— 4.00 

(101.6) 

5 

 

6 

C 

Reset Travel 

L 

B 

B 

Weight, 

Lbs (kg) 

10.0 

(4.5) 

11.0 

(5.0) 

11.0 

(5.0) 

13.0 

(5.9) 

28.0 

(12.7) 

33.5 

(15.2) 



A200 Series 

33.2 

Relays—Thermal and Fast Trip 


Product Overview 

Type B and Type A, Class 20 

Thermal Overload Relays 

from Eaton’s electrical sector 

will protect the motor against 

abnormal overload conditions. 

Bimetallic actuated, they are 

available as either ambient 

compensated or noncompensated 

in either singlepole 

or block type three-pole 

design. Type B use one pole 

of the three-pole block for 

single-phase. 

Single-pole relays are also 

available as Fast Trip Class 10 

ambient compensated type, 

which provides approximately 

125% motor protection with 

a tripping time of less than 

10 seconds, at 600% of 

heater current rating. 

Fast trip relays can be 

identified by the green reset 

rods. They are available for 

panel or starter mounting. 

The three-pole fast trip 

design is composed of 

three single-pole relays 

on a common baseplate, 

with a common reset bar. 

The bimetal element is 

actuated by precisely 

calibrated heater elements 

which are connected directly 

in the circuit to be protected. 

Thermal actuation of this 

device opens the contacts in 

the coil circuit of a contactor 

or relay which results in the 

disconnection of power to 

the overloaded circuit. 

Interchangeable thermal 

heater elements for singlepole 

standard trip and block 

type overload relays are 

available to cover motor full 

load currents from 0.29 to 

133A in approximately 10% 

steps (see Heater Application 

Table). Fast trip overload 

relays do not have 

interchangeable heater 

elements but are available 

in a series of ratings to cover 

motor full load currents from 

1.6 to 150A in approximately 

50% steps. 

Contents 

Description 

Page 


Starters—Non-Reversing and Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 



Instruction Leaflets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 

Thermal Type B, Class 20, Manual Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 


Type FT Fast Trip, Class 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 

Heater Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 


Features 

Manual or Automatic Reset 

Type B is furnished with a 

manual reset. Type A is 

normally furnished set for 

manual reset operation and 

may be quickly adjusted 

for automatic reset when 

required. Automatic reset 

should not be used with 

two-wire control or where 

automatic restarting would 

endanger either personnel 

or equipment. 

Trip Indication 

An immediate visible 

indication of trip is provided 

on the overload relay. When 

an overload occurs, which 

causes the relay to operate, 

a trip indicator projects out 

and thus shows positive 

visual indication of trip. 

Type B has a mechanical 

trip bar to manually check 

the NC contact operation on 

the overload relay. 

Adjustable Trip 

On Type A, the trip rating of a 

specific heater element can 

be adjusted over a range of 

approximately 85% to 115% 

of its respective rating to 

permit the desired close 

protection. 

This is accomplished by 

turning the adjusting knob 

on the relay to the respective 

stop position. 

Positive Contact Break 

A follow-through contact, 

provided on the stationary 

terminal of the snap action 

control switch, provides 

reliable electrical continuity 

during toggling, thus 

eliminating false trip 

sometimes prevalent 

with thermally operated 

switches. This contact also 

allows contact wipe for 

further reliability. 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Ambient Compensation 

Motor overload protection 

can be provided with the 

same trip characteristics in 

ambient temperature from 

–40° to 77°C (–40° to 167°F). 

A compensating bimetal 

maintains a constant “travel 

to trip” distance independent 

of ambient conditions. 

The compensating feature 

is fully automatic and no 

adjustments are required 

over wide fluctuations in 

ambient temperatures. 

Compensated relays are 

identified by black reset rods 

on Type A and light gray reset 

rods on Type B, while noncompensated 

relays use red 

reset rods. AA three-pole 

units have gray reset rods. 

AA one-pole units have black 

reset rods. 

Control Contact 

Single-pole and block 

type relays are supplied as 

standard with a SPST NC 

control contact. A SPDT 

NO-NC with common is 

available as a factory 

modification on Type A. 

An isolated NO contact can 

be supplied on Type B as 

either a factory modification 

or as a field kit. 


● 

UL 508 

● 

CSA 

● 

ANSI/NEMA ICS 2-222 

Instruction Leaflets 

14885B Fast Trip A 

Sizes 0–4, 3-Pole 

OL Relay 

14567E Type A Sizes 1–2, 

1-Pole OL Relay 

Mod A 

14568 Type A Sizes 1–2, 


Mod J 

14570D Type A Sizes 3–4, 


Mod J 

14569C Type A Sizes 3–4, 


Mod A 

17093A Type B OLR for 

Sizes 7, 8 and 

9 Contactors 

16955A Type B Sizes 1–2, 


16954A Type B Sizes 1–2, 


15392B Type B Sizes 3–4, 


13676F Fast Trip Sizes 0–4, 


33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 



A200 Series 

33.2 

Thermal Type B, Class 20, Manual Reset 



The Type B overload relay is 

designed to protect industrial 

motors against overload 

conditions. Using modern 

block type, bimetallic design, 

this relay will provide 

Class 20 operation in either 

single-phase or three-phase 

applications. 

Operation 

The Type B overload relay 

is a bimetallic actuated 

device. The bimetal elements 

are operated by precisely 

calibrated heaters. The heater 

elements are connected 

either directly in the circuit 

to be measured, or through 

current transformers on 

applications NEMA Size 5 

and larger. 

As the bimetals are heated 

by motor current flow, a 

deflection force is produced. 

Upon a sustained level of 

abnormal current flow, the 

deflection becomes great 

enough to open the snapaction 

output contact. 

Contents 

Description 

Page 



Relays—Thermal and Fast Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 



Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 


Type FT Fast Trip, Class 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 



Ambient Compensation 

The Type B ambient 

compensated design is 

supplied as standard on 

all A200 starters. This design 

uses a second compensating 

bimetal responsive to 

ambient air temperature in 

the surrounding enclosure. 

This feature reduces 

nuisance tripping in 

applications using compact 

control panels and motor 

control centers where 

internal temperature rise 

is significant compared to 

motor ambient temperature. 

The compensating 

characteristic is maintained 

in ambient temperatures 

from 40° to 77°C. 

Features 

● Ambient compensation 

standard 

● Alarm contact field 

mountable 

● Class 20—600V design 

● Inverse time delay trip 

● Test trip device for weld 

check 

● Hi-visibility up-front trip 

indication 

● Trip-free reset mechanism 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


Heaters 



number from tables, 



Relays 

Type B Overload Relay 

Panel Mounting 

Accessories 

Thermal Type B Overload Relay 

Motor Full 

Load Amps 

Panel Mounted 

Ambient Comp. 


Alarm Contact Kit Selection 

Type B Overload Relay Size 


1, 2 B3NO-2 

3, 4 B3NO-4 

Non-Comp. 


Notes 

Includes contactor mounting bracket, overload relay and connection straps to contactor. 

For replacement on B200 size 00, 0, 1 use BA23A instead of BA13A and use BN23A instead 

of BN13A. 

Starter Mounted 

Replacement for 

Type B Overload Relays 

Ambient Comp. 


Non-Comp. 


Replacement for Type A Overload Relays in 

Manual Reset Mode (Three-Pole Only) 

Ambient Comp. 


Single-Pole (One NC Contact) 

0.25–26.2 BA11JP BN11JP BA11A BN11A — — 

26.3–45 BA21JP BN21JP BA21A BN21A — — 

19–90 Use three-pole 

design, wire three 

poles in series 

19–135 Use three-pole 



Three-Pole (One NC Contact) 

Use three-pole 
























0.25–26.2 BA13JP BN13JP BA13A BN13A BA13J BN13J 

26.3–45 BA23JP BN23JP BA23A BN23A BA23J BN23J 

19–90 BA33P BN33P BA33A BN33A BA33A BN33A 

19–135 BA43P BN43P BA43A BN43A BA43A BN43A 

Non-Comp. 










A200 Series 

33.2 

Technical Data 

Control Contact Ratings—NEMA B600 NO and 

NC Control Contact Rating 

AC Volts Make Break 

24–120 30A 3A 

120–600 3600 VA 360 VA 

Dimensions 



Thermal Type B Overload Relays 

Sizes 1 and 2—Three-Pole, Panel Mounted 

1.98 

(50.3) 

0.2 (5.1) Dia. 

6 Mtg. Slots 

3.31 

(84.1) 

0.8 

(20.3) 

0.94 (23.9) 

.17 

(4.3) 

2.81 3.14 

(71.4) (79.8) 

0.41 (10.4) 0.53 

(13.5) 

4.00 

(101.6) 

2.22 

(56.4) 

Dimensions 

Relay Size A B C D 

3 3.13 (79.5) 4.06 (103.1) 044 (11.2) 0.31 (7.9) 

4 3.38 (85.9) 4.38 (111.3) 0.31 (7.9) 0.19 (4.8) 

Note 

 

Alarm contact available as factory modification of field mountable. For factory modification, 

add suffix B. 

Sizes 3 and 4—Three-Pole, Panel Mounted 

C 

A 

D 

1.34 (34.0) 

B 

2.22 

(56.4) 

0.47 

(11.9) 

0.28 (7.1) Dia. 

3 Mtg. Slots 

4.44 

(112.8) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

3.38 

(85.9) 

1.75 (44.5) 

1.38 (35.1) 

5.28 

(134.1) 

3.88 

(98.6) 

0.47 (11.9) 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Thermal Type A, Class 20, Auto/Manual Reset 


Application Description Features 

The Type A overload relay is 

● 

designed to protect industrial auto reset 

motors against overload 

● 

conditions. Using modern 

available 

block type, bimetallic design, 

● 

this relay will provide Class 

● 

20 operation in either singleor 

three-phase applications. 

Field selectable manual/ 

Alarm contract factory 

Class 20—600V design 

Inverse time delay trip 

● Adjustable trip rating ±15% 

● Color coded reset rod: 

● Compensated (gray) 

● Non-compensated (red) 

Contents 

Description 

Page 








Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 




Operation 

The Type A overload relay is 

a bimetallic actuated device. 

The bimetal elements are 

operated by precisely 

calibrated heaters. The 

heater elements are 

connected either directly in 

the circuit to be measured, or 

through current transformers 

on applications NEMA Size 5 

and larger. 

As the bimetals are heated 

by motor current flow, a 





enough to open the snapaction 

output contact. 

Automatic Reset 

The Type A overload relay can 

be supplied as an option on 

all A200 starters to provide 

automatic reset operation. 

The overload relay is always 

shipped in the non-automatic 

mode. To set up auto 

operation, reposition the 

reset rod by loosening and retightening 

a hold-down clamp 

at the base of overload relay. 



A200 Series 

33.2 


Heaters 



number from tables, 



Relays 

Type A Overload Relay 

Single-Pole Panel 

Mounting 


Thermal Type A Overload Relay 

Motor Full 

Load Amps 

Panel Mounted 

Starter Replacement 

Ambient Comp. Non-Comp. Ambient Comp. Non-Comp. 

Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 

Single-Pole (One NC Contact) 

0.25–26.2 AA11P AN11P AA11A AN11A 

26.3–45 AA21P AN21P AA21A AN21A 

19–90 AA31P AN31P AA31A AN31A 

19–135 AA41P AN41P AA41A AN41A 

Three-Pole (One NC Contact) 

0.25–26.2 AA13P AN13P AA13A AN13A 

26.3–45 AA23P AN23P AA23A AN23A 

19–90 AA33P AN33P AA33A AN33A 

19–135 AA43P AN43P AA43A AN43A 

Control Contact Ratings 

AC 


Normally Open 

Volts 

Make Break Make Break 

Three-Pole Control Contact Ratings 

24–120 20A 2A 0.5A 0.5A 

120–600 2400 VA 240 VA 600 VA 60 VA 

Single-Pole Control Contact Ratings 

24–120 30A 3A 10A 1A 

120–600 3600 VA 360 VA 1200 VA 120 VA 

Notes 

 

For alarm contact (Form C), add Suffix B. Available only as factory modification on Type A relay. 

 

Three-pole Type B overload relay is a suitable alternative to a three-pole Type A overload relay in 

manual reset mode. For example, BA13JP for AA13P, BN23J for AN23A, etc. (See Page 94.) 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Dimensions 



Type A 

Single-Pole (Sizes 4 Shown) 

B 

G 

H 

Dimensions 

Dimension 

T 

S 

C 

Q 

F 

E 

D 

K Dia. 

2 Mtg. 

Holes 

Relay Size 

1 2 3 4 

N 

P 

M 

L 

A 2.72 (69.1) 3.48 (88.4) 4.19 (106.4) 4.5 (114.3) 

B 0.94 (23.9) 0.67 (17.0) 0.25 (6.4) 0.38 (9.7) 

C 2.75 (69.9) 3.5 (88.9) 3.53 (89.7) 3.78 (96.0) 

D 3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6) 4.13 (104.9) 4.13 (104.9) 

E 2.63 (66.8) 2.63 (66.8) 3.38 (85.9) 3.38 (85.9) 

F 1.34 (34.0) 1.34 (34.0) 2.19 (55.6) 2.19 (55.6) 

G 0.25 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 0.28 (7.1) 0.28 (7.1) 

H 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.38 (9.7) 0.38 (9.7) 

J 0.06 (1.5) 0.06 (1.5) 0.06 (1.5) 0.06 (1.5) 

K 0.22 (5.6) 0.22 (5.6) 0.27 (6.8) 0.27 (6.8) 

L 1.34 (34.0) 1.34 (34.0) 1.69 (42.9) 1.69 (42.9) 

M 0.66 (16.8) 0.66 (16.8) 0.88 (22.4) 0.88 (22.4) 

N 0.16 (4.1) 0.16 (4.1) 0.27 (6.8) 0.27 (6.8) 

P 0.22 (5.6) 0.22 (5.6) 0.34 (8.6) 0.34 (8.6) 

Q 0.06 (1.5) 0.06 (1.5) 0.69 (17.5) 0.69 (17.5) 

R 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 5.19 (131.8) 5.19 (131.8) 

S 0.47 (11.9) 0.47 (11.9) 0.59 (15.0) 0.59 (15.0) 

T 1.11 (28.2) 1.11 (28.2) 0.69 (17.5) 0.69 (17.5) 

J 

A 

Trip 

Indicator 

Common 

Terminal 

No Terminal 

(When 

Supplied) 

NC Terminal 

R 

Three-Pole (Size 4 Shown) 

D 

E 

C 

A 

G F 

R 

N 

Q P 

J Dia.—3 Mtg. Slots 

K 

H 

B 

L 

M 

Dimensions 

Relay Size 

Dimension 1 2 3 4 

A 2.38 (60.5) 2.44 (62.0) 3.13 (79.5) 3.38 (85.9) 

B 3.13 (79.5) 3.17 (80.5) 4.06 (103.1) 4.38 (111.3) 

C 0.36 (9.1) 0.33 (8.4) 0.44 (11.2) 0.31 (7.9) 

D 1.66 (42.2) 1.66 (42.2) 2.22 (56.4) 2.22 (56.4) 

E 0.17 (4.3) 0.17 (4.3) 0.25 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 

F 2.81 (71.4) 2.81 (71.4) 3.38 (85.9) 3.38 (85.9) 

G 3.08 (78.2) 3.08 (78.2) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 

H 0.47 (11.9) 0.47 (11.9) 0.47 (11.9) 0.47 (11.9) 

J 0.20 (5.1) 0.20 (5.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.28 (7.1) 

K 0.28 (7.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.47 (11.9) 0.47 (11.9) 

L 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 5.28 (134.1) 5.28 (134.1) 

M 3.31 (84.1) 3.31 (84.1) 4.44 (112.8) 4.44 (112.8) 

N 1.80 (45.7) 1.80 (45.7) 2.77 (70.4) 2.77 (70.4) 

P 1.89 (48.0) 1.89 (48.0) 1.75 (44.5) 1.75 (44.5) 

Q 1.00 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.34 (34.0) 1.34 (34.0) 

R — — 1.03 (26.2) 1.03 (26.2) 



A200 Series 

33.2 

Type FT Fast Trip, Class 10 

Contents 

Description 

Page 



Relays—Thermal and Fast Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 

Thermal Type B, Class 20, Manual Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 





Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 



The Type FT overload relay is 

designed to protect special 

purpose motors having 

restricted thermal and locked 

rotor capabilities. Using 

modern block type, bimetallic 

design, this relay will provide 

Class 10 operation in singleor 

three-phase applications. 

Operation 

The Type FT overload relay is 

a bimetallic actuated device. 

The bimetal elements are 

operated directly from line 

current, thus separate 

calibrating heater elements 

are not utilized. The overload 

relay may be wired directly in 

the motor circuit, or throughcurrent 

transformers on 

applications larger than 150A. 

As the bimetals are heated by 

motor current flow, a 





enough to open the snap 

action output contact. 

Features 

● Class 10—600V design 

● Inverse time delay trip 

● Color coded reset rod— 

green 

● Alarm contact factory 

available 

● Field selectable manual/ 

auto reset 

● Adjustable trip rating 

±20% 

● Ambient compensation 

included 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


Type FT Single-Pole 


Type FT Single-Pole (One NC Contact); Three-Phase (Three NC Contacts in Series) 

Motor Full Load 

Amperes 

Panel Mounted 

Starter Replacement 

Single-Pole 

Three-Pole 

Single-Pole 

Catalog Number Catalog Number NEMA Size Catalog Number 

0.76–1.1 FT11P-1.1 FT13P-1.1 — FT11A-1.1 

1.1–1.6 FT11P-1.6 FT13P-1.6 — FT11A-1.6 

1.6–2.4 FT11P-2.4 FT13P-2.4 0, 1 FT11A-2.4 

2.4–3.6 FT11P-3.6 FT13P-3.6 0, 1 FT11A-3.6 

3.6–5.4 FT11P-5.4 FT13P-5.4 0, 1 FT11A-5.4 

5.4–8.0 FT11P-8.0 FT13P-8 0, 1 FT11A-8 

8.0–12 FT11P-12 FT13P-12 0, 1 FT11A-12 

12–18 FT11P-18 FT13P-18 1 FT11A-18 

16–24 — FT13P-24 — 

22–32 FT11P-32 FT13P-32 0, 1 FT11A-32 

24–36 FT21P-36 FT23P-36 2 FT21A-36 

36–54 FT21P-54 FT23P-54 12 FT21A-54 

22–32 FT31P-32 FT33P-32 3 FT31A-32 

32–48 FT31P-48 FT33P-48 3 FT31A-48 

48–72 FT31P-72 FT33P-72 3 FT31A-72 

72–110 FT41P-110 FT43P-110 4 FT41A-110 

100–150 FT41P-150 FT43P-150 4 FT41A-150 

Control Contact Ratings 


Normally Open 

AC Volts 

Make Break Make Break 

24–120 30A 3A 10A 1A 

120–600 3600 VA 360 VA 1200 VA 120 VA 

Note 

 

Single-pole (1NO-NC contact): add suffix B. Three-pole (3NO-NC contacts): add suffix B. Example: FT13PB-12. 



A200 Series 

33.2 

Dimensions 



Type FT Overload Relays 

Three-Pole, Size 1 

3.25 

(82.6) 

2.81 

(71.4) 

Three-Pole, Size 2 

3.61 

(91.7) 

0.17 

(4.3) 

3.25 

(82.6) 2.81 

(71.4) 

Three-Pole, Sizes 3, 4 

D 

3.88 

(98.6) 3.38 

(85.9) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

Dimensions 

0.19 

(4.8) 

0.11 

(2.8) 

1.30 

(33.0) 

1.64 

(41.7) 

0.19 0.50 

(4.8) (12.7) 

1.00 (25.4) 

1.30 

(33.0) 

0.06 

(1.5) 

0.16 (4.1) 

1.75 

(44.5) 

E 

0.69 

(17.5) 

0.11 

(2.8) 

0.88 (22.4) 

0.50 (12.7) 

1.00 (25.4) 

3.28 (83.3) 

1.64 

(41.7) 

0.22 

(5.6) 

3.28 (83.3) 

0.17 (4.3) 

3 Mtg. 

Holes 

0.22 

(5.6) 

4.41 (112) 

2.20 

0.48 

(55.9) 

(12.2) 

1.42 

(36.1) 

1.75 (44.5) 

0.69 

(17.5) 

0.69 

(17.5) 

0.17 (4.3) 

3 Mtg. 

Holes 

0.63 

(16.0) 

Relay Size A B C D E 

3 4.25 (108.0) 0.53 (13.5) 2.91 (73.9) 0.09 (2.3) 0.06 (1.5) 

4 4.50 (114.3) 0.59 (15.0) 3.03 (77.0) 0.22 (5.6) 0.19 (4.8) 

C 

0.28 (7.1) 

3 Mtg. 

Holes 

4.49 (114) Hand Reset Pos. 

4.38 (111.3) Auto Reset Pos. 

2.72 

(69.1) 

0.06 

(1.5) 

0.38 

(9.7) 



3.48 

(88.4) 

0.06 

(1.5) 

3.28 (83.3) 

0.06 

(1.5) 

0.06 

(1.5) 



A 

3.31 (84.1) 

0.06 

(1.5) 

2.81 (71.4) 

0.28 (7.1) 

0.06 

(1.5) 

B 0.74 

(18.8) 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Heater Selection 

General Information on Heater Coil Selection 

For maximum motor 

protection and compliance 

with Article 430-32 of the 

National Electrical Code, 

select heater coils from the 

tables in this section on the 

basis of motor nameplate 

full load current. 

When the full load current is 

unknown, selection may be 

made on the basis of average 

full load currents as shown on 


Caution—The average 

ratings could be high or 

low for a specific motor and 

Type A and B Overload Relays, Sizes 3 and 4 

Size 

Starter 

For Size 4 Starters 


Ambient Compensated 

Enclosed Starters 

All Applications 

therefore selection on this 

basis always involves risk. 

For fully reliable motor 

protection, select heater 

coils on the basis of full 

load current rating as 

shown on the motor 

nameplate. 

Heater coils are rated to 

protect 40°C rise motors, and 

open and drip-proof motors 

having a service factor of 

1.15 where the motor and 

the controller are at the same 

ambient temperature. 

Non-Compensating 


Full Load Current of Motor Amps 

12.8–14.1 11.9–13.0 FH68 

14.2–15.5 13.1–14.3 FH69 

15.6–17.1 14.4–15.9 FH70 

17.2–18.9 16.0–17.4 FH71 

19.0–20.8 17.5–19.1 FH72 

20.9–22.9 19.2–21.1 FH73 

23.0–25.2 21.2–23.2 FH74 

25.3–27.8 23.3–25.6 FH75 

27.9–30.6 25.7–28.1 FH76 

30.7–33.5 28.2–30.8 FH77 

33.6–37.5 30.9–34.5 FH78 

37.6–41.5 34.6–38.2 FH79 

41.6–56.3 38.3–42.6 FH80 

46.4–50 42.7–46 FH81 

51–55 47–51 FH82 

56–61 52–56 FH83 

62–66 57–61 FH84 

67–73 62–67 FH85 

74–78 68–72 FH86 

79–84 73–77 FH87 

85–92 78–84 FH88 

93–101 85–91 FH89 

102–110 92–99 FH90 

111–122 100–110 FH91 

123–129 111–122 FH92 

130–133 123–128 FH93 

— 129–133 FH94 

Heater (One Heater 

per Catalog Number) 


For other conditions: 

1. For 50°C, 55°C, 75°C rise 

motors and enclosed 

motors having a 

service factor of 1.0, 

select one 

size smaller coil. 

2. Ambient temperature of 

controller lower than 

motor 

by 26°C (47°F), use one 

size smaller coil. 

3. Ambient temperature of 

controller higher than 

motor by 26°C (47°F), 

use one size larger coil. 

Ultimate tripping current of 

heater coils is approximately 

1.25 times the minimum 

current rating listed in the 

tables. 

Type A and B Overload Relays, Sizes 5 and 6 

Compensated Overload Relay 

Heater (One Heater per 

Open Starter 

Enclosed Starter 

Catalog Number) 

Full Load Current of Motor (Amps) 


Size 5 (with 300/5 Current Transformers) 

— — FH23 

118–129 118–129 FH24 

130–141 130–141 FH25 

142–155 142–155 FH26 

156–170 156–170 FH27 

171–187 171–187 FH28 

188–205 188–205 FH29 

206–224 206–224 FH30 

225–244 225–244 FH31 

245–263 245–263 FH32 

264–292 264–292 FH33 

293–300 — FH34 

Size 6 (with 600/5 Current Transformers) 

— — FH23 

236–259 236–259 FH24 

260–283 260–283 FH25 

284–310 284–310 FH26 

311–340 311–340 FH27 

341–374 341–374 FH28 

375–411 375–411 FH29 

412–448 412–448 FH30 

449–489 449–489 FH31 

490–527 490–527 FH32 

528–585 528–540 FH33 

586–600 — FH34 

Note 

 

Size 7 and larger—advise full load current. 



A200 Series 

33.2 

Type A and B Overload Relays, Sizes 0, 1 and 2 

Non-Compensated Open Starters and 

Ambient Comp. Open and Enclosed Starters 

Size 

Starter 

Block Type Overload 

sing Three Heaters 

Single-Pole Type 

Overload 

Heater (One Heater 

per Catalog Number) 


Non-Compensating 


Block Type Overload 

Using Three Heaters 

Single-Pole Type 

Overload 

Full Load Current of Motor (Amps) 

0.25–0.27 0.29–0.31 FH03 0.24–0.25 0.28–0.30 FH03 

0.28–0.31 0.32–0.35 FH04 0.26–0.28 0.31–0.34 FH04 

0.32–0.34 0.36–0.39 FH05 0.29–0.31 0.35–0.37 FH05 

0.35–0.38 0.40–0.43 FH06 0.32–0.35 0.38–0.42 FH06 

0.39–0.42 0.44–0.48 FH07 0.36–0.39 0.43–0.47 FH07 

0.43–0.46 0.49–.053 FH08 0.40–0.43 0.48–0.52 FH08 

0.47–0.50 0.54–0.58 FH09 0.44–0.47 0.53–0.56 FH09 

0.51–0.55 0.59–0.64 FH10 0.48–0.51 0.57–0.63 FH10 

0.56–0.62 0.65–0.71 FH11 0.52–0.57 0.64–0.70 FH11 

0.63–0.68 0.72–0.79 FH12 0.58–0.63 0.71–0.77 FH12 

0.69–0.75 0.80–0.87 FH13 0.64–0.70 0.78–0.85 FH13 

0.76–0.83 0.88–0.96 FH14 0.71–0.77 0.86–0.94 FH14 

0.84–0.91 0.97–1.06 FH15 0.78–0.85 0.95–1.03 FH15 

0.92–1.00 1.07–1.16 FH16 0.86–0.93 1.04–1.13 FH16 

1.01–1.11 1.17–1.28 FH17 0.94–1.03 1.14–1.25 FH17 

1.12–1.22 1.29–1.41 FH18 1.04–1.13 1.26–1.38 FH18 

1.23–1.34 1.42–1.55 FH19 1.14–1.25 1.39–1.52 FH19 

1.35–1.47 1.56–1.71 FH20 1.26–1.37 1.53–1.67 FH20 

1.48–1.62 1.72–1.87 FH21 1.38–1.51 1.68–1.83 FH21 

1.63–1.78 1.88–2.06 FH22 1.52–1.65 1.84–2.01 FH22 

1.79–1.95 2.07–2.26 FH23 1.66–1.81 2.02–2.21 FH23 

1.96–2.15 2.27–2.48 FH24 1.82–1.99 2.22–2.43 FH24 

2.16–2.35 2.49–2.72 FH25 2.00–2.19 2.44–2.66 FH25 

2.36–2.58 2.73–2.99 FH26 2.20–2.39 2.67–2.92 FH26 

2.59–2.83 3.00–3.28 FH27 2.40–2.63 2.93–3.21 FH27 

2.84–3.11 3.29–3.60 FH28 2.64–2.89 3.22–3.53 FH28 

3.12–3.42 3.61–3.95 FH29 2.90–3.17 3.54–3.87 FH29 

3.43–3.73 3.96–4.31 FH30 3.18–3.47 3.88–4.22 FH30 

3.74–4.07 4.32–4.71 FH31 3.48–3.79 4.23–4.61 FH31 

4.08–4.39 4.72–5.14 FH32 3.80–4.11 4.62–4.9 FH32 

4.40–4.87 5.15–5.6 FH33 4.12–4.55 5.0–5.5 FH33 

4.88–5.3 5.7–6.2 FH34 4.56–5.0 5.6–6.0 FH34 

5.4–5.9 6.3–6.8 FH35 5.1–5.5 6.1–6.6 FH35 

6.0–6.4 6.9–7.5 FH36 5.6–5.9 6.7–7.3 FH36 

6.5–7.1 7.6–8.2 FH37 6.0–6.6 7.4–8.0 FH37 

7.2–.78 8.3–9.0 FH38 6.7–7.2 8.1–8.7 FH38 

7.9–8.5 9.1–9.9 FH39 7.3–7.9 8.8–9.7 FH39 

8.6–9.4 10.0–10.8 FH40 8.0–8.7 9.8–10.5 FH40 

9.5–10.3 10.9–11.9 FH41 8.8–9.5 10.6–11.7 FH41 

10.4–11.3 12.0–13.1 FH42 9.6–10.5 11.8–12.7 FH42 

11.4–12.4 13.2–14.3 FH43 10.6–11.5 12.8–14.0 FH43 

12.5–13.5 14.4–15.7 FH44 11.6–12.6 14.1–15.3 FH44 

13.6–14.9 15.8–17.2 FH45 12.7–13.8 15.4–16.6 FH45 

15.0–16.3 17.3–18.9 FH46 13.9–15.1 16.7–18.3 FH46 

16.4–18.0 19.0–20.8 FH47 15.2–16.7 18.4–20.0 FH47 

18.1–19.8 20.9–22.9 FH48 16.8–18.3 20.1–21.9 FH48 

19.9–21.7 23.0–25.2 FH49 18.4–20.2 22.0–23.9 FH49 

21.8–23.9 25.3–27.6 FH50 20.3–22.2 24.0–26.2 FH50 

24.0–26.2 27.7–30.3 FH51 22.3–24.3 26.3–28.8 FH51 

26.3–28.7 30.4–33.3 FH52 24.4–26.6 28.9–31.4 FH52 

28.8–31.4 33.4–36.4 FH53 26.7–29.1 31.5–34.5 FH53 

31.5–34.5 36.5–39.9 FH54 29.2–32.0 34.6–37.9 FH54 

34.6–37.9 40.0–43.9 FH55 32.1–35.2 3.80–41.9 FH55 

38.0–41.5 FH56 35.3–38.5 42.0–45.0 FH56 

41.6–45.0 FH57 38.6–42.3 FH57 




Heater 


33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Relays—Current Sensing Protective 



The IQ500 is a heaterless, 

current-sensing, solid-state 

motor protective relay with 

optional communications 

capabilities. Several functions 

are incorporated into the base 

relay (IQ502/IQ504) as 

standard: 

● 

● 

● 

Overload (overcurrent) 

protection 

Phase unbalance and 

phase loss protection 

Ground current protection 

(Class II) 

The base relay can serve as 

the initial building block for a 

motor protection system by 

adding the IQ500M Special 

Function Module. The 

module can address 

application related motor load 

functions with the additional 

features: 

● 

● 

● 

● 

Underload protection 

Long acceleration 

Jam protection 

Load control 

The IQ500 can provide a costeffective 

alternative to 

conventional protective relays 

such as current relays, 

ground fault relays and phase 

loss or phase unbalance 

relays. Used with the 

PowerNet system, a lowcost, 

local area 

communication network, 

information such as current 

values, status, setpoint 

values and cause of trip can 

be displayed remotely. The 

IQ500 relay is ideal for a 

variety of industrial 

applications such as mining, 

timber, material handling, air 

conditioning compressors, 

wastewater treatment plants 

and petrochemical industries. 

Contents 

Description 

Page 











Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 



A200 Series 

33.2 

Features 

● 

Overload class is 

adjustable using DIP 

switches for 5, 10, 20 or 30 

seconds, maximum trip 

times at six times rated 

current 

● 

Designed for 1000V and 

less distribution systems 

● 

Form C (NO/NC) contact 

on output relay 

● Isolated alarm relay output 

contact 

● Communications capability 

using IMPACC network 

● 

Manual or automatic reset 

(either a true manual or 

remote electrical reset)— 

selectable 

● Overload, Class II ground 

current, phase unbalance 

and single-phase 

protection are standard 

● LED indication (bicolored—red/green) 

for 

device status, including 

overload, phase unbalance 

or ground current trip 

● Special Function Module 

adds protection for 

underload and jam 

conditions, also provides 

for long acceleration 


● UL File No. E19223 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

Optional load control 

feature available with 

special function module 

Feed-through current 

transformer windows for 

contactors, NEMA Sizes 1– 

4 (for Size 5 and larger, 

external current 

transformers can be used) 

Fits mounting footprint of 

Eaton’s MORA relay 

Panel or starter mountable 

Cause of trip is held in 

memory through a power 

loss 

Bell alarm contact available 

for remote status 

indication 

DIP switch provided for 

setting operating 

frequency—50 or 60 Hz 

Plug-in terminal block for 

control power, trip relay 

and bell alarm relay 

connections 

Operating temperature: 

–20° to 60°C (–4° to 140°F) 

Benefits 

● No external current 

transformers are required 

since they are internal to 

the IQ500 

● 

● 

● 

DIP switches used to 

select functions and 

settings on base relay are 

clearly marked and 

covered with screw-on 

plastic covers 

On the automatic reset, 

the reset times can be 

selected for long (90 

second) or short (10 

second) delay 

Device can be set for 

different motor full load 

currents without additional 

parts or modules 

Optional Benefits 

● 

With the addition of the 

IQ500M Special Function 

Module, the enhanced 

protection includes jam 

(overtorque) and underload 

and provides long 

acceleration time (high 

inertia load) 

● The underload and jam 

protection functions each 

have independent Form C 

output relays as part of the 

module. In addition, the 

underload and jam 

functions each have their 

own LEDs for status 

indication 

● 

● 

● 

● 

The underload and jam 

functions also have 

separate selectable trip 

levels and adjustable tripdelay 

and start-delay 

settings 

The IQ500M can be used 

as a load control module 

that allows “shedding and 

restoring” a particular load 

that contributes to the load 

being monitored 

The PONI (Product 

Operated Network 

Interface) card attaches 

directly to the base relay or 

special function module for 

interfacing with the Eaton’s 

PowerNet communications 

system 

Localized display can be 

achieved with the Central 

Monitoring Unit 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33 

33 

IQ502A 

Current Sensing Protective Relay 

Maximum Horsepower 

200V 230V 460–475V 

Ampere 

Rating 

Note 

 

Can be used with external CTs having 5A secondary. 

Control Voltage 

110/120V 50/60 Hz 


220/240V 50/60 Hz 


20 25 50 3.4–66A IQ502A IQ502B 

60 75 150 10.8–207A IQ504A IQ504B 

— — — 0.32–5.4A IQ500LA IQ500LB 

Special function module IQ500M IQ500M 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.2 


A200 Series 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Dimensions 


Current Sensing Protective Relays 

IQ504 

IQ500L and IQ502 

0.19 (4.8) 

Dia. 

0.164-32 Tap 

2 Holes 

0.44 (11.2) 

Dia. 

2.88 

(73.2) 

3.59 

(91.2) 

4.5 

(114.3) 

0.5 

(12.7) 

1.88 

(47.8) 

3.59 

(91.2) 

0.53 

(13.5) 

4.88 

(124.0) 

2.5 3.0 

(63.5) (76.2) 3.25 

(82.6) 

1.19 

0.78 (30.2) 

(19.8) 

2.75 

(69.9) 

4.13 

(104.9) 

0.81 

(20.6) 

Dia. 

0.5 

(12.7) 

Dia. 

5.47 

(138.9) 

4.88 

(124.0) 

5.47 

(138.9) 

4.13 

(104.9) 



Solenoids—Alternating Current 

33.3 



Solenoids from Eaton’s 

electrical sector are used for 

a wide variety of applications 

where straight line motion is 

to be obtained automatically 

or at a remote point. 

Features 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

Plunger and frame are 

machined to ensure 

quiet operation 

Push- and pull-type 

operation 

With and without 

terminal box 

Plunger provided with 

connecting pin 

Size C and D solenoids 

are provided with special 

bearing to minimize 

wear in clevis under 

severe service 

Contents 

Description 

Page 



Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.3 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 



● 


10370 

AC Solenoids—60 Hz, Continuous Duty 

Operating Data 

Magnetic Force in Lbs 

Horizontal Position With Gravity Against Gravity Max. 

Current 

At 100% At 85% At 100% At 85% At 100% At 85% Stroke in 

Size Volt. Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Inches (mm) Inrush Sealed 

Notes 

 

Mounting of solenoids “with conduit box”—Size A are for wall mounting—Size B, C and D are for floor mounting. 

 

Recommended selection of solenoids on basis of 85% voltage values. 

 

Part numbers are now obsolete. 

Without 

Conduit Box 

Floor Mtg. 

Catalog 

Number 

Wall Mtg. 

Catalog 

Number 

With 

Conduit Box 

Mtg. 

Catalog 

Number 

60 Hertz Pull Type 

A 110 0.72 0.50 0.90 0.68 0.55 0.33 1 (25.4) 1.83 0.34 — 10370H1 10370H610 

220 0.72 0.50 0.90 0.68 0.55 0.33 1 (25.4) 0.92 0.17 — 10370H2 10370H611 

440 0.72 0.50 0.90 0.68 0.55 0.33 1 (25.4) 0.45 0.08 — 10370H3 10370H612 

B 110 4.2 3 4.5 3.3 3.9 2.7 1 (25.4) 5.4 0.87 10370H57 10370H694 10370H69 

220 4.2 3 4.5 3.3 3.9 2.7 1 (25.4) 2.6 0.42 10370H58 10370H696 10370H70 

440 4.2 3 4.5 3.3 3.9 2.7 1 (25.4) 1.29 0.20 10370H59 10370H697 10370H71 

C 110 7 5.25 8 6.25 6 4.25 1.25 (31.8) 10.4 1.07 10370H244 — 10370H256 

220 7 5.25 8 6.25 6 4.25 1.25 (31.8) 5.2 0.52 10370H245 — 10370H257 

440 7 5.25 8 6.25 6 4.25 1.25 (31.8) 2.5 0.26 10370H246 — 10370H258 

D 110 12.4 10 13.65 11.25 11.15 8.75 1.25 (31.8) 18 1.58 10370H356 10370H814 10370H368 

220 12.4 10 13.65 11.25 11.15 8.75 1.25 (31.8) 9.3 0.81 10370H357 10370H816 10370H369 

440 12.4 10 13.65 11.25 11.15 8.75 1.25 (31.8) 4.4 0.40 10370H358 10370H817 10370H370 

60 Hertz Push Type 

A 110 0.72 0.50 0.90 0.68 0.55 0.33 1 (25.4) 1.83 0.34 — 10370H13 10370H25 

220 0.72 0.50 0.90 0.68 0.55 0.33 1 (25.4) 0.92 0.17 — 10370H14 10370H26 

440 0.72 0.50 0.90 0.68 0.55 0.33 1 (25.4) 0.45 0.08 — 10370H15 10370H27 

B 110 4.2 3 4.5 3.3 3.9 2.7 1 (25.4) 5.4 0.87 10370H81 10370H708 10370H93 

220 4.2 3 4.5 3.3 3.9 2.7 1 (25.4) 2.6 0.42 10370H82 10370H710 10370H94 

440 4.2 3 4.5 3.3 3.9 2.7 1 (25.4) 1.29 0.20 10370H83 10370H711 10370H95 

C 110 7 5.25 8 6.25 6 4.25 1.25 (31.8) 10.4 1.07 10370H268 — 10370H280 

220 7 5.25 8 6.25 6 4.25 1.25 (31.8) 5.2 0.52 — 10370H774 10370H281 

440 7 5.25 8 6.25 6 4.25 1.25 (31.8) 2.5 0.26 — 10370H775 10370H282 

D 110 12.4 10 13.65 11.25 11.15 8.75 1.25 (31.8) 18 1.58 10370H380 10370H828 10370H392 

220 12.4 10 13.65 11.25 11.15 8.75 1.25 (31.8) 9.3 0.81 10370H381 10370H830 10370H393 

440 12.4 10 13.65 11.25 11.15 8.75 1.25 (31.8) 4.4 0.40 10370H382 10370H831 10370H394 




33.3 

Dimensions 


AC Solenoids 

Wall Mounted 

D 

A 

E 


Size 

Push Type 

Wide 

A 

Note 

 

In sealed state. 

B 

High 

B 

C 

Floor Mounted 

D 

A 

Mounting 

Deep 

C D E 

B 

E 

C 

Shipping 

Weight 

Lbs (kg) 

Pull Type 

Wide 

A 

High 

B 

Mounting 

Deep 

C D E 

Shipping 

Weight 

Lbs (kg) 

Wall Mounted 

A 2.38 (60.5) 3.63 (92.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.13 (28.7) 1.63 (41.4) 2.0 (0.9) 2.38 (60.5) 2.63 (66.8) 2.25 (57.2) 1.13 (28.7) 1.63 (41.4) 2.0 (0.9) 

B 2.63 (66.8) 4.88 (124.0) 3.00 (76.2) 2.00 (50.8) 2.13 (54.1) 2.5 (1.1) 2.63 (66.8) 3.63 (92.2) 3.00 (76.2) 2.00 (50.8) 2.13 (54.1) 2.5 (1.1) 

C 3.00 (76.2) 6.13 (155.7) 4.13 (104.9) 2.38 (60.5) 3.13 (79.5) 5.0 (2.3) 3.00 (76.2) 4.88 (124.0) 4.13 (104.9) 2.38 (60.5) 3.13 (79.5) 5.0 (2.3) 

D 4.00 (101.6) 6.13 (155.7) 4.13 (104.9) 2.75 (69.9) 3.13 (79.5) 7.0 (3.2) 4.00 (101.6) 4.88 (124.0) 4.13 (104.9) 2.75 (69.9) 3.13 (79.5) 7.0 (3.2) 

Floor Mounted 

B 3.13 (79.5) 4.88 (124.0) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 2.25 (57.2) 2.5 (1.1) 3.13 (79.5) 3.88 (98.6) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 2.25 (57.2) 2.5 (1.1) 

C 3.50 (88.9) 6.13 (155.7) 3.75 (95.3) 1.75 (44.5) 3.13 (79.5) 5.0 (2.3) 3.50 (88.9) 4.88 (124.0) 3.75 (95.3) 1.75 (44.5) 3.13 (79.5) 5.0 (2.3) 

D 3.88 (98.6) 6.13 (155.7) 3.75 (95.3) 2.25 (57.2) 3.13 (79.5) 7.0 (3.2) 3.88 (98.6) 4.88 (124.0) 3.75 (95.3) 2.25 (57.2) 3.13 (79.5) 7.0 (3.2) 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.4 


Shoe Brakes—AC and DC Magnetic 

33 

33 

33 

Shoe Brakes—AC and DC, 511 Series 

Contents 

Description 

Page 



Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


Type S Brakes from 

Eaton’s electrical sector 

re electrically released and 

spring applied providing 

“fail-safe” operation. The 

retarding torque developed 

is directly proportional to the 

spring pressure. 


● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

● 

Conveyors 

Machine tools 

Printing presses 

Small cranes 

Overhead doors 

Dumb waiters 

Vacuum molding machines 

Carnival rides 

Features 

The brake wheel is of 

relatively large size in relation 

to the torque developed by 

the brake. This permits use of 

a larger brake shoe lining and 

lower shoe pressures. Low 

shoe pressure, equally 

distributed over a large lining 

area, results in even wear of 

the friction surfaces and even 

braking torque. The oversize 

wheel type construction also 

permits use of a smaller 

operating solenoid that 

requires less current for a 

given torque rating. 

DC Brakes 

Standard DC brakes are 

equipped with shunt coils. 

The magnet coil circuit on 

DC brakes consists of two 

separate windings and a 

protective switch. 

Mounting 

Type S brakes are designed 

and recommended for use 

and mounting only in the 

horizontal position. Side or 

vertical mountings are not 

recommended because the 

solenoid loading is altered, 

resulting in accelerated wear 

and premature coil failure. 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 




33.4 



● 

Brake 

● 


suffix number for coil 

● 

Example: 511H1193-41 

● 

Wheel 

● 


suffix number for 

bore size 

● Example: 511H1150-3 

Size S-4 Brake 

and Wheel 

Type S Brakes—Floor Mounting 

Torque—lb-ft 

AC 

Base 

For Type S4, S5-1/2, S7, S10 Base 

Brake Catalog 

Coil Volts Coil 

Catalog 

Continuous Intermittent Size Number and Hertz Suffix Number 

3 3 S-4 511H1194 120V 60 Hz -39 

511H955 

10 10 S-4 511H1193 

208V 60 Hz -45 

240V 60 Hz -40 

511H956 

— 15 S-4 511H1192 480V 60 Hz -41 

511H957 

25 

— 

25 

35 

S-5-1/2 

S-5-1/2 

511H992 

511H993 

600V 60 Hz 

220V 50 Hz 

-58 

-6 

110V 50 Hz 

380V 50 Hz 

-5 

-7 

511H994 

511H995 

50 

— 

50 

75 

S-7 

S-7 

511H970 

511H971 

440V 50 Hz 

550V 50 Hz 

-8 

-9 

511H975 

511H976 

85 85 S-7 511H1195 511H1197 

— 110 S-7 511H1196 511H1198 

Notes 

 

Intermittent duty indicates that the coil can be placed across the line continuously for one hour maximum without excessive heating. It is equivalent to 1/2 time ON 

and 1/2 time OFF. 

 

Add suffix number for coil voltage to base catalog number. 

 

Does not include wheel. 

DC 

Coil 

Voltage 

120 Vdc 

240 Vdc 

Coil 

Suffix 

-97 

-98 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.4 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Brake Selection 

The method most generally used to determine required 

braking torque is to calculate the full load motor torque by 

the following formula: 

T = 5252 x hp 

rpm 

T = Full load motor torque in lb-ft 

hp = Motor horsepower 

rpm = Speed of shaft on which brake wheel is mounted 

The torque rating of the brake selected should be at least equal 

to the full load motor torque for the duty considered. 

Brake Wheels 

Brake Wheel Suffix Numbers 

Bore Size Suffix Number—Add to Base Catalog Number 

Bore in Inches (mm) Keyway in Inches Suffix Number Bore in Inches (mm) Keyway in Inches (mm) Suffix Number 

Wheel 

Size in 

Inches 

Min. 

Bore in 

Inches (mm) 

Notes 

 

Bore tolerance: +0.000–0.001 in. 

Taper is at rate of 1.25 in per ft on diameter. In bore size selection, use diameter of tapered shaft. Bore tolerance: +0.000–0.005 in. 

Add suffix number for bore size to base catalog number. 

Bore size selected must be between minimum and maximum dimensions listed in brake wheel selection table. 

Max. 

Bore in 

Inches (mm) 

Pilot 

Bore in 

Inches (mm) WK 2 Straight 

Bore 

Base 

Catalog 

Number 

Tapered 

Bore 

Base 

Catalog 

Number 

4.0 0.50 (12.7) 1.38 (35.1) 0.50 (12.7) 0.06 511H1150 511H1151 

5.5 0.75 (19.1) 2.00 (50.8) 0.75 (19.1) 0.26 511H1160 511H1161 

7.0 1.00 (25.4) 2.25 (57.2) 0.75 (19.1) 0.77 511H1170 511H1171 

Standard Bore Sizes 

Pilot bore None -1 1.625 (41.28) 3/38 x 3/16 -9 

0.625 (15.88) 3/16 x 3/32 -2 1.875 (47.63) 1/2 x 1/4 -10 

0.750 (19.05) 3/16 x 3/32 -3 2.125 (53.98) 1/2 x 1/4 -11 

0.875 (22.23) 3/16 x 3/32 -4 2.375 (60.33) 5/8 x 5/16 -12 

1.000 (25.40) 1/4 x 1/8 -5 2.500 (63.50) 5/8 x 5/16 -63 

1.125 (28.58) 1/4 x 1/8 -6 2.625 (66.68) 5/8 x 5/16 -13 

1.250 (31.75) 1/4 x 1/8 -7 2.750 (69.85) 5/8 x 5/16 -18 

1.375 (34.93) 5/16 x 5/32 -8 2.875 (73.03) 3/4 x 3/8 -14 

Non-Standard Bore Sizes 

0.500 (12.70) 1/8 x 1/16 -50 1.687 (42.85) 3/8 x 3/16 -58 

0.750 (19.05) 1/4 x 1/8 -51 1.750 (44.45) 3/8 x 3/16 -59 

0.875 (22.23) 1/4 x 1/8 -52 1.937 (49.20) 1/2 x 1/4 -60 

1.000 (25.40) 5/16 x 5/32 -53 2.000 (50.80) 1/2 x 1/4 -61 

1.187 (30.15) 1/4 x 1/8 -54 2.250 (57.15) 1/2 x 1/4 -62 

1.375 (34.93) 3/8 x 3/16 -55 — — — 

1.437 (36.50) 3/8 x 3/16 -56 — — — 

1.500 (38.10) 3/8 x 3/16 -57 — — — 




33.4 

Dimensions 


Standard Brake Wheels 

A 

X 

Y 

Standard Brake Wheel Dimensions 

A Z W X Y 

Approximate Shipping Weights 

Weight in Lbs (kg) 

Note 

Hub lengths other than standard are not available. 

Bore 

Max. 

4.00 (101.6) 2.75 (69.9) 1.63 (41.4) 1.38 (35.1) 2.50 (63.5) 1.38 (35.1) 0.50 (12.7) 

5.50 (139.7) 3.25 (82.6) 2.00 (50.8) 1.63 (41.4) 3.25 (82.6) 2.00 (50.8) 0.75 (19.1) 

7.00 (177.8) 4.25 (108.0) 3.00 (76.2) 1.25 (31.8) 4.00 (101.6) 2.25 (57.2) 1.00 (25.4) 

Brake Size 

Z 

W 

Torque Rating 

ft-lb 

Net — 

Brake with Wheel 

Net — 

Wheel Only 

Min. 

Boxed — 

Brake with Wheel 

Type “S” AC Shoe Brakes 

S-4 3 15.8 (7.2) 3.4 (1.5) 17.0 (7.7) 

S-4 10 15.8 (7.2) 3.4 (1.5) 17.0 (7.7) 

S-4 15 15.8 (7.2) 3.4 (1.5) 17.0 (7.7) 

S-5-1/2 25 33.2 (15.1) 7.5 (3.4) 36.0 (16.3) 

S-5-1/2 35 33.2 (15.1) 7.5 (3.4) 36.0 (16.3) 

S-7 50 52.1 (23.7) 18.8 (8.5) 55.0 (25.0) 

S-7 75 52.1 (23.7) 18.8 (8.5) 55.0 (25.0) 

Type “S” DC Shoe Brakes 

S-4 3 18.0 (8.2) 3.4 (1.5) 20.0 (9.1) 

S-4 10 18.0 (8.2) 3.4 (1.5) 20.0 (9.1) 

S-4 15 18.0 (8.2) 3.4 (1.5) 20.0 (9.1) 

S-5-1/2 25 35.0 (15.9) 7.5 (3.4) 38.0 (17.3) 

S-5-1/2 35 35.0 (15.9) 7.5 (3.4) 38.0 (17.3) 

S-7 50 54.0 (24.5) 18.8 (8.5) 58.0 (26.3) 

S-7 75 54.0 (24.5) 18.8 (8.5) 58.0 (26.3) 

S-7 85 54.0 (24.5) 18.8 (8.5) 58.0 (26.3) 

S-7 110 54.0 (24.5) 18.8 (8.5) 58.0 (26.3) 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.4 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


Type S4, S5-1/2 and S7 Solenoid Operated 

R 

P 

Type “S” AC Shoe Brakes 

Brake 

Size 

Torque 

Rating 

ft-lb A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P Q R 

S-4 3 4.00 

(101.6) 

S-4 10 4.00 

(101.6) 

S-4 15 4.00 

(101.6) 

S-5-1/2 25 5.50 

(139.7) 

S-5-1/2 35 5.50 

(139.7) 

S-7 50 7.00 

(177.8) 

S-7 75 7.00 

(177.8) 

Type “S” DC Shoe Brakes 

Brake 

Size 

S 

T 

F 

Note 

Open type brake only. 

D 

2.88 

(73.2) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

4.00 

(101.6) 

4.00 

(101.6) 

5.00 

(127.0) 

5.00 

(127.0) 

7.50 

(190.5) 

7.50 

(190.5) 

7.50 

(190.5) 

9.50 

(241.3) 

9.50 

(241.3) 

11.50 

(292.1) 

11.50 

(292.1) 

2.63 

(66.8) 

2.63 

(66.8) 

2.63 

(66.8)) 

3.50 

(88.9) 

3.50 

(88.9) 

4.38 

(111.3) 

4.38 

(111.3) 

1.25 

(31.8) 

1.25 

(31.8) 

1.25 

(31.8) 

2.00 

(50.8) 

2.00 

(50.8) 

2.50 

(63.5) 

2.50 

(63.5) 

7.50 

(190.5) 

7.50 

(190.5) 

7.50 

(190.5) 

8.38 

(212.9) 

8.38 

(212.9) 

9.50 

(241.3) 

9.50 

(241.3) 

3.13 

(79.5) 

3.13 

(79.5) 

3.13 

(79.5) 

4.13 

(104.9) 

4.13 

(104.9) 

5.00 

(127.0) 

5.00 

(127.0) 

0.38 

(9.7) 

0.38 

(9.7) 

0.38 

(9.7) 

0.44 

(11.2) 

0.44 

(11.2) 

0.56 

(14.2) 

0.56 

(14.2) 

0.63 

(16.0) 

0.63 

(16.0) 

0.63 

(16.0) 

1.00 

(25.4) 

1.00 

(25.4) 

1.00 

(25.4) 

1.00 

(25.4) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

4.88 

(124.0) 

7.88 

(200.2) 

6.00 

(152.4) 

6.00 

(152.4) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

0.38 

(9.7) 

0.38 

(9.7) 

2.75 

(69.9) 

2.75 

(69.9) 

2.75 

(69.9) 

3.25 

(82.6) 

3.25 

(82.6) 

— 4.25 

(108.0) 

— 4.25 

(108.0) 

1.63 

(41.4) 

1.63 

(41.4) 

1.63 

(41.4) 

2.00 

(50.8) 

2.00 

(50.8) 

2.13 

(54.1) 

2.13 

(54.1) 

1.63 

(41.4) 

1.63 

(41.4) 

1.63 

(41.4) 

2.00 

(50.8) 

2.00 

(50.8) 

3.00 

(76.2) 

3.00 

(76.2) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

3.13 

(79.5) 

3.13 

(79.5) 

3.13 

(79.5) 

3.13 

(79.5) 

3.00 

(76.2) 

3.00 

(76.2) 

3.00 

(76.2) 

3.75 

(95.3) 

3.75 

(95.3) 

4.75 

(120.7) 

4.75 

(120.7) 

Torque 

Rating 

ft-lb A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P Q R 

S-4 3 4.00 

(101.6) 

S-4 10 4.00 

(101.6) 

S-4 15 4.00 

(101.6) 

S-5-1/2 25 5.50 

(139.7) 

S-5-1/2 35 5.50 

(139.7) 

S-7 50 7.00 

(177.8) 

S-7 75 7.00 

(177.8) 

S-7 85 7.00 

(177.8) 

S-7 110 7.00 

(177.8) 

A 

K 

D 

G 

3.50 

(88.9) 

3.50 

(88.9) 

3.50 

(88.9) 

4.00 

(101.6) 

4.00 

(101.6) 

5.00 

(127.0) 

5.00 

(127.0) 

5.00 

(127.0) 

5.00 

(127.0) 

U E 

J 

8.00 

(203.2) 

8.00 

(203.2) 

8.00 

(203.2) 

9.50 

(241.3) 

9.50 

(241.3) 

11.50 

(292.1) 

11.50 

(292.1) 

11.50 

(292.1) 

11.50 

(292.1) 

C 

Q 

B 

2.63 

(66.8) 

2.63 

(66.8) 

2.63 

(66.8) 

3.50 

(88.9) 

3.50 

(88.9) 

4.38 

(111.3) 

4.38 

(111.3) 

4.38 

(111.3) 

4.38 

(111.3) 

M 

O 

N 

(2) “H” Dia. Holes 

for Mounting 

1.25 

(31.8) 

1.25 

(31.8) 

1.25 

(31.8) 

2.00 

(50.8) 

2.00 

(50.8) 

2.50 

(63.5) 

2.50 

(63.5) 

2.50 

(63.5) 

2.50 

(63.5) 

L 

Hub 

Length 

7.56 

(192.0) 

7.56 

(192.0) 

7.56 

(192.0) 

8.38 

(212.9) 

8.38 

(212.9) 

9.50 

(241.3) 

9.50 

(241.3) 

9.50 

(241.3) 

9.50 

(241.3) 

3.25 

(82.6) 

3.25 

(82.6) 

3.25 

(82.6)) 

4.13 

(104.9) 

4.13 

(104.9) 

5.00 

(127.0) 

5.00 

(127.0) 

5.00 

(127.0) 

5.00 

(127.0) 

0.38 

(9.7) 

0.38 

(9.7) 

0.38 

(9.7) 

0.44 

(11.2) 

0.44 

(11.2) 

0.56 

(14.2) 

0.56 

(14.2) 

0.56 

(14.2) 

0.56 

(14.2) 

0.75 

(19.1) 

0.75 

(19.1) 

0.75 

(19.1) 

0.75 

(19.1) 

0.75 

(19.1) 

0.75 

(19.1) 

0.75 

(19.1) 

0.75 

(19.1) 

0.75 

(19.1) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

4.88 

(124.0) 

4.88 

(124.0) 

6.00 

(152.4) 

6.00 

(152.4) 

6.00 

(152.4) 

6.00 

(152.4) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

0.25 

(6.4) 

.25 

(6.4) 

0.38 

(9.7) 

0.38 

(9.7) 

2.75 

(69.9) 

2.75 

(69.9) 

2.75 

(69.9) 

3.25 

(82.6) 

3.25 

(82.6) 

— 4.25 

(108.0) 

— 4.25 

(108.0) 

— 4.25 

(108.0) 

— 4.25 

(108.0) 

1.63 

(41.4) 

1.63 

(41.4) 

1.63 

(41.4) 

2.00 

(50.8) 

2.00 

(50.8) 

2.13 

(54.1) 

2.13 

(54.1) 

2.13 

(54.1) 

2.13 

(54.1) 

1.63 

(41.4) 

1.63 

(41.4) 

1.63 

(41.4) 

2.00 

(50.8) 

2.00 

(50.8) 

3.00 

(76.2) 

3.00 

(76.2) 

3.00 

(76.2) 

3.00 

(76.2) 

2.63 

(66.8) 

2.63 

(66.8) 

2.63 

(66.8) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

2.88 

(73.2) 

3.00 

(76.2)) 

3.00 

(76.2) 

3.00 

(76.2) 

3.75 

(95.3) 

3.75 

(95.3) 

4.88 

(124.0) 

4.88 

(124.0) 

4.88 

(124.0) 

4.88 

(124.0) 

3.13 

(79.5) 

3.13 

(79.5) 

3.13 

(79.5)) 

3.13 

(79.5) 

3.13 

(79.5) 

3.13 

(79.5) 

3.13 

(79.5) 

4.06 

(103.1) 

4.06 

(103.1)) 

4.06 

(103.1) 

4.06 

(103.1) 

4.06 

(103.1) 

4.06 

(103.1) 

4.06 

(103.1) 

4.06 

(103.1) 

4.06 

(103.1) 



Reference Data 

33.5 


IEC Utilization Categories 

(See also IEC/EN 60947-1; 

2.1.18/IEV 441-17-19) 

A combination of specified 

requirements relating to the 

condition in which the 

switching device or fuse 

fulfills its purpose and 

selected to represent a 

characteristic group of reallife 

applications. The 

specified requirements may, 

for example, relate to the 

values of making and 

breaking capacity and other 

characteristic values, data 

concerning associated 

circuits and the applicable 

conditions of use and 

operational behavior. 

Used in Technical Data and Formulas 

Code Descriptions Code Descriptions 

DF Duty factory I rmv Response value of short-time delayed short-circuit release 

I Dn Response value of earth-fault release I sd Response value of short-time delayed short-circuit release 

I cm Rated short-circuit making capacity I T Response value of earth-fault release 

I cn Rated short-circuit breaking capacity I g Response value of earth-fault release 

I cs Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity I th Conventional free air thermal current 

I cu Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity I the Conventional thermal current of enclosed devices 

I cw Rated short-time withstand current I u Rated uninterrupted current 

I e Rated operational current S NT Transformer rating 

I k Transformer initial short-circuit AC current t r Time delay of overload release response 

I L Load monitoring response value t T Time delay of earth-fault release response 

I n Rated current t g Time delay of earth-fault release response 

I NT Transformer rated current t v Time delay of short-circuit release response 

I PK Rated peak withstand current U c Rated actuating voltage 

I q Rated conditional short-circuit current U e Rated operational voltage 

I r Overcurrent release set value U i Rated insulation voltage 

I rm Response value of non-delayed short-circuit release U imp Rated impulse withstand voltage 

I i Response value of non-delayed short-circuit release U k Transformer short-circuit voltage 

I rmf Response value of fixed, non-delayed short-circuit release U s Rated control voltage 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.5 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Annex A (informative) 

Examples of Utilization Categories for Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear 

Category Typical Applications Relevant IEC Product Standard 

Nature of Current—AC 

AC-1 Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces 60947-4-1 

AC-2 Slip-ring motors: starting, switching off 60947-4-1 

AC-3 Squirrel-cage motors: starting, switching off motors during running 60947-4-1 

AC-4 Squirrel-cage motors: starting, plugging , inching 60947-4-1 

AC-5a Switching of electric discharge lamp controls 60947-4-1 

AC-5b Switching of incandescent lamps 60947-4-1 

AC-6a Switching of transformers 60947-4-1 

AC-6b Switching of capacitor banks 60947-4-1 

AC-7a Slightly inductive loads for household appliances and similar applications 61095 

AC-7b Motor-loads for household applications 61095 

AC-8a Hermetic refrigerant compressor motor control with manual resetting of overload releases 60947-4-1 

AC-8b Hermetic refrigerant compressor motor control with automatic resetting of overload releases 60947-4-1 

AC-12 Control of resistive loads and solid-state loads with isolation by optocouplers 60947-5-1 

AC-12 Control of resistive loads and solid-state loads with optical isolation 60947-5-2 

AC-13 Control of solid-state loads with transformer isolation 60947-5-1 

AC-14 Control of small electromagnetic loads 60947-5-1 

AC-15 Control of AC electromagnetic loads 60947-5-1 

AC-20 Connecting and disconnecting under no-load conditions 60947-3 

AC-21 Switching of resistive loads, including moderate overloads 60947-3 

AC-22 Switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads, including moderate overloads 60947-3 

AC-23 Switching of motor loads or other highly inductive loads 60947-3 

AC-31 Non inductive or slightly inductive loads 60947-6-1 

AC-33 Motor loads or mixed loads including motors, resistive loads and up to 30% incandescent lamp loads 60947-6-1 

AC-35 Electric discharge lamp loads 60947-6-1 

AC-36 Incandescent lamp loads 60947-6-1 

AC-40 Distribution circuits comprising mixed resistive and reactive loads having a resultant inductive reactance 60947-6-2 


AC-42 Slip-ring motors: starting, switching off 60947-6-2 

AC-43 Squirrel cage motors: starting, switching off motors during running 60947-6-2 

AC-44 Squirrel cage motors: starting, plugging , inching 60947-6-2 




AC-52a Control of slip ring motor stators: 8 h duty with on-load currents for start, acceleration, run 60947-4-2 

AC-52b Control of slip ring motor stators: intermittent duty 60947-4-2 

AC-53a Control of squirrel cage motors: 8 h duty with on-load currents for start, acceleration, run 60947-4-2 

AC-53b Control of squirrel cage motors: intermittent duty 60947-4-2 

Notes 

60947-1 © IEC: 2004. 

Plugging is understood to be stopping or reversing the motor rapidly by reversing motor primary connections while the motor is running. 

Inching is understood to be energizing a motor once or repeatedly for short periods to obtain small movements of the driven mechanism. 




33.5 

Examples of Utilization Categories for Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear, continued 

Category Typical Applications Relevant IEC Product Standard 

Nature of Current—AC, continued 



AC-56a Switching of transformers 60947-4-3 

AC-56b Switching of capacitor banks 60947-4-3 

AC-58a 

Control of hermetic refrigerant compressor motors with automatic resetting of overload releases: 8 h duty 

60947-4-2 

with on-load currents for start, acceleration, run 

AC-58b Control of hermetic refrigerant compressor motors with automatic resetting of overload releases: intermittent duty 60947-4-2 

AC-140 Control of small electromagnetic loads with holding (closed) current ≤ 0,2 A, e.g. contactor relays 60947-5-2 

Nature of Current—AC and DC 

A Protection of circuits, with no rated short-time withstand current 60947-2 

B Protection of circuits, with a rated short-time withstand current 60947-2 

Nature of Current—DC 

DC-1 Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces 60947-4-1 

DC-3 Shunt-motors: starting, plugging , inching , dynamic breaking of motors 60947-4-1 

DC-5 Series-motors: starting, plugging , inching , dynamic breaking of motors 60947-4-1 

DC-6 Switching of incandescent lamps 60947-4-1 

DC-12 Control of resistive loads and solid-state loads with isolation by optocouplers 60947-5-1 

DC-12 Control of resistive loads and solid-state loads with optical isolation 60947-5-2 

DC-13 Control of electromagnets 60947-5-1 

DC-13 Control of electromagnets 60947-5-2 

DC-14 Control of electromagnetic loads having economy resistors in circuit 60947-5-1 

DC-20 Connecting and disconnecting under no-load conditions 60947-3 

DC-21 Switching of resistive loads, including moderate overloads 60947-3 

DC-22 Switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads, including moderate overloads (e.g. shunt motors) 60947-3 

DC-23 Switching of motor loads or other highly inductive loads (e.g. series motors) 60947-3 

DC-31 Resistive loads 60947-6-1 

DC-33 Motor loads or mixed loads including motors 60947-6-1 

DC-36 Incandescent lamp loads 60947-6-1 

DC-40 Distribution circuits comprising mixed resistive and reactive loads having a resultant inductive reactance 60947-6-2 

DC-41 Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces 60947-6-2 

DC-43 Shunt-motors: starting, plugging , inching , dynamic breaking of DC 60947-6-2 

DC-45 Series-motors: starting, plugging , inching , dynamic breaking of DC 60947-6-2 

DC-46 Switching of incandescent lamps 60947-6-2 

Notes 

 

60947-1 © IEC: 2004. 

 

Plugging is understood to be stopping or reversing the motor rapidly by reversing motor primary connections while the motor is running. 

 

Inching is understood to be energizing a motor once or repeatedly for short periods to obtain small movements of the driven mechanism. 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 


33.5 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

Motor Ratings Data 

Ampere Rating of AC and DC Motors 

Ampere ratings of motors 

vary somewhat, depending 

upon the type of motor. The 

values given below are for 

drip-proof, Class B insulated 

(T Frame) where available, 

1.15 service factor, NEMA 

Design B motors. These 

values represent an average 

full load motor current which 

was calculated from the 

motor performance data 

published by several motor 

manufacturers. In the case 

of high torque squirrel cage 

motors, the ampere ratings 

will be at least 10% greater 

than the values given in the 

following table. 

Caution—These average 

ratings could be high or 

low for a specific motor 

and therefore heater coil 

selection on this basis 

always involves risk. 

For fully reliable motor 

protection, select heater 

coils on the basis of full 

load current rating as 

shown on the motor 

nameplate. 

Ampere Ratings of Three-Phase, 60 Hz, AC Induction Motor 

Syn. Speed Current in Amperes 

hp RPM 200V 230V 380V 460V 575V 2200V 

1/4 1800 1.09 .95 0.55 0.48 0.38 — 

1200 1.61 1.40 0.81 0.70 0.56 — 

900 1.84 1.60 0.93 0.80 0.64 — 

1/3 1800 1.37 1.19 0.69 0.60 0.48 — 

1200 1.83 1.59 0.92 0.80 0.64 — 

900 2.07 1.80 1.04 0.90 0.72 — 

1/2 1800 1.98 1.72 0.99 0.86 0.69 — 

1200 2.47 2.15 1.24 1.08 0.86 — 

900 2.74 2.38 1.38 1.19 0.95 — 

3/4 1800 2.83 2.46 1.42 1.23 0.98 — 

1200 3.36 2.92 1.69 1.46 1.17 — 

900 3.75 3.26 1.88 1.63 1.30 — 

1 3600 3.22 2.80 1.70 1.40 1.12 — 

1800 4.09 3.56 2.06 1.78 1.42 — 

1200 4.32 3.76 2.28 1.88 1.50 — 

33 

900 4.95 4.30 2.60 2.15 1.72 — 

1-1/2 3600 5.01 4.36 2.64 2.18 1.74 — 

33 

33 

33 

1800 5.59 4.86 2.94 2.43 1.94 — 

1200 6.07 5.28 3.20 2.64 2.11 — 

900 6.44 5.60 3.39 2.80 2.24 — 

2 3600 6.44 5.60 3.39 2.80 2.24 — 

1800 7.36 6.40 3.87 3.20 2.56 — 

33 

1200 7.87 6.84 4.14 3.42 2.74 — 

900 9.09 7.90 4.77 3.95 3.16 — 

33 

3 3600 9.59 8.34 5.02 4.17 3.34 — 

1800 10.8 9.40 5.70 4.70 3.76 — 

33 

33 

33 

1200 11.7 10.2 6.20 5.12 4.10 — 

900 13.1 11.4 6.90 5.70 4.55 — 

5 3600 15.5 13.5 8.20 6.76 5.41 — 

1800 16.6 14.4 8.74 7.21 5.78 — 

1200 18.2 15.8 9.59 7.91 6.32 — 

33 

900 18.3 15.9 9.60 7.92 6.33 — 

7-1/2 3600 22.4 19.5 11.8 9.79 7.81 — 

33 

1800 24.7 21.5 13.0 10.7 8.55 — 

1200 25.1 21.8 13.2 10.9 8.70 — 

33 

33 

33 

900 26.5 23.0 13.9 11.5 9.19 — 

10 3600 29.2 25.4 15.4 12.7 10.1 — 

1800 30.8 26.8 16.3 13.4 10.7 — 

1200 32.2 28.0 16.9 14.0 11.2 — 

900 35.1 30.5 18.5 15.2 12.2 — 

33 

15 3600 41.9 36.4 22.0 18.2 14.5 — 

1800 45.1 39.2 23.7 19.6 15.7 — 

33 

1200 47.6 41.4 25.0 20.7 16.5 — 

900 51.2 44.5 26.9 22.2 17.8 — 

33 

33 

33 

20 3600 58.0 50.4 30.5 25.2 20.1 — 

1800 58.9 51.2 31.0 25.6 20.5 — 

1200 60.7 52.8 31.9 26.4 21.1 — 

900 63.1 54.9 33.2 27.4 21.9 — 

Note 

33 

 

380V 50 Hz. 




33.5 

Ampere Ratings of Three-Phase, 60 Hz, AC Induction Motor, 

continued 

hp 

Syn. Speed 

RPM 

Current in Amperes 

200V 230V 380V 460V 575V 2200V 

25 3600 69.9 60.8 36.8 30.4 24.3 — 

1800 74.5 64.8 39.2 32.4 25.9 — 

1200 75.4 65.6 39.6 32.8 26.2 — 

900 77.4 67.3 40.7 33.7 27.0 — 

30 3600 84.8 73.7 44.4 36.8 29.4 — 

1800 86.9 75.6 45.7 37.8 30.2 — 

1200 90.6 78.8 47.6 39.4 31.5 — 

900 94.1 81.8 49.5 40.9 32.7 — 

40 3600 111 96.4 58.2 48.2 38.5 — 

1800 116 101 61.0 50.4 40.3 — 

1200 117 102 61.2 50.6 40.4 — 

900 121 105 63.2 52.2 41.7 — 

50 3600 138 120 72.9 60.1 48.2 — 

1800 143 124 75.2 62.2 49.7 — 

Single-Phase AC Motors 

The following values of fullload 

currents are for motors 

running at usual speeds and 

motors with normal torque 

characteristics. Motors built 

for especially low speeds or 

high torques may have higher 

full-load currents and 

multispeed motors will have 

full-load current varying with 

speed, in which case the 

nameplate current ratings 

shall be used. 

The voltages listed are rated 

motor voltages. The currents 

listed shall be permitted for 

system voltage ranges of 110 

to 120 and 220 to 240V. 

Table 430.248. Full-Load 

Currents in Amperes, 

Single-Phase Alternating- 

Current Motors 

hp 115V 200V 208V 230V 

1/6 4.4 2.5 2.4 2.2 

1/4 5.8 3.3 3.2 2.9 

1/3 7.2 4.1 4.0 3.6 

1/2 9.8 5.6 5.4 4.9 

3/4 13.8 7.9 7.6 6.9 

1 16 9.2 8.8 8 

1-1/2 20 11.5 11 10 

2 24 13.8 13.2 12 

3 34 19.6 18.7 17 

5 56 32.2 30.8 28 

7-1/2 80 46 44 40 

10 100 57.5 55 50 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

1200 145 126 76.2 63.0 50.4 — 

900 150 130 78.5 65.0 52.0 — 

Note 

 

380V 50 Hz. 

33 

60 3600 164 143 86.8 71.7 57.3 — 

1800 171 140 90.0 74.5 59.4 — 

33 

1200 173 150 91.0 75.0 60.0 — 

900 177 154 93.1 77.0 61.5 — 

75 3600 206 179 108 89.6 71.7 — 

1800 210 183 111 91.6 73.2 — 

1200 212 184 112 92.0 73.5 — 

33 

33 

33 

900 222 193 117 96.5 77.5 — 

100 3600 266 231 140 115 92.2 — 

33 

1800 271 236 144 118 94.8 23.6 

1200 275 239 145 120 95.6 24.2 

33 

900 290 252 153 126 101 24.8 

125 3600 — 292 176 146 116 — 

1800 — 293 177 147 117 29.2 

1200 — 298 180 149 119 29.9 

900 — 305 186 153 122 30.9 

33 

33 

33 

150 3600 — 343 208 171 137 — 

1800 — 348 210 174 139 34.8 

33 

1200 — 350 210 174 139 35.5 

900 — 365 211 183 146 37.0 

33 

200 3600 — 452 257 226 181 — 

1800 — 458 265 229 184 46.7 

1200 — 460 266 230 184 47.0 

900 — 482 279 241 193 49.4 

250 3600 — 559 338 279 223 — 

33 

33 

33 

1800 — 568 343 284 227 57.5 

1200 — 573 345 287 229 58.5 

33 

900 — 600 347 300 240 60.5 

300 1800 — 678 392 339 271 69.0 

33 

1200 — 684 395 342 274 70.0 

400 1800 — 896 518 448 358 91.8 

500 1800 — 1110 642 555 444 116 

33 

33 

33 


33.5 



33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

33 

DC Motors 


currents are for motors 

running at base speed. 

These are average directcurrent 

quantities. 

Table 430.247. Full-Load Current in Amperes, 

Direct-Current Motors 

hp 

Ampere Capacity of Fuses for Motors 

Armature Voltage Rating Recommended Values 

120V 240V 120V 240V 

1/4 3.1 1.6 5 3 

1/3 4.1 2.0 5 3 

1/2 5.4 2.7 7 3 

3/4 7.6 3.8 10 5 

1 9.5 4.7 15 7 

1-1/2 13.2 6.6 20 10 

2 17 8.5 25 12 

3 25 12.2 30 15 

5 40 20 50 25 

7-1/2 58 29 80 40 

10 76 38 100 50 

15 — 55 — 75 

20 — 72 — 100 

25 — 89 — 125 

30 — 106 — 150 

40 — 140 — 200 

50 — 173 — 250 

60 — 206 — 275 

75 — 255 — 350 

100 — 341 — 500 

125 — 425 — 600 

150 — 506 — — 

200 — 675 — — 

Three-Phase AC Motors 


currents are typical for 

motors running at speeds 

usual for belted motors and 

motors with normal torque 

characteristics. 

Motors built for low speeds 

(1,200 RPM or less) or high 

torques may require more 

running current and 

multispeed motors will have 

Table 430.250. Full-Load Current Three-Phase 

Alternating-Current Motors 

hp 

Induction Type Squirrel Cage and 

Wound-Rotor Amperes 

full-load current varying with 

speed. In these cases the 

nameplate current rating shall 

be used. 

The voltages listed are rated 

motor voltages. The currents 

listed shall be permitted for 

system voltage ranges of 110 

to 120, 220 to 240, 440 to 

480 and 550 to 600V. 

Synchronous Type Unity 

Power Factor Amperes 

115V 200V 208V 230V 460V 575V 2300V 230V 460V 575V 2300V 

1/2 4.4 2.5 2.4 2.2 1.1 0.9 — — — — — 

3/4 6.4 3.7 3.5 3.2 1.6 1.3 — — — — — 

1 8.4 4.8 4.6 4.2 2.1 1.7 — — — — — 

1-1/2 12.0 6.9 6.6 6.0 3.0 2.4 — — — — — 

2 13.6 7.8 7.5 6.8 3.4 2.7 — — — — — 

3 — 11.0 10.6 9.6 4.8 3.9 — — — — — 

5 — 17.5 16.7 15.2 7.6 6.1 — — — — — 

7-1/2 — 25.3 24.2 22 11 9 — — — — — 

10 — 32.2 30.8 28 14 11 — — — — — 

15 — 48.3 46.2 42 21 17 — — — — — 

20 — 62.1 59.4 54 27 22 — — — — — 

25 — 78.2 74.8 68 34 27 — 53 26 21 — 

30 — 92 88 80 40 32 — 63 32 26 — 

40 — 120 114 104 52 41 — 83 41 33 — 

50 — 150 143 130 65 52 — 104 52 42 — 

60 — 177 169 154 77 62 16 123 61 49 12 

75 — 221 211 192 96 77 20 155 78 62 15 

100 — 285 273 248 124 99 26 202 101 81 20 

125 — 359 343 312 156 125 31 253 126 101 25 

150 — 414 396 360 180 144 37 302 151 121 30 

200 — 552 528 480 240 192 49 400 201 161 40 

250 — — — — 302 242 60 — — — — 

300 — — — — 361 289 72 — — — — 

350 — — — — 414 336 83 — — — — 

400 — — — — 477 382 95 — — — — 

450 — — — — 515 412 103 — — — — 

500 — — — — 590 472 118 — — — — 

Notes 

These are average direct-current quantities. 

For 90 and 80 percent power factor, the above figures shall be multiplied by 1.1 and 

1.25 respectively.

NEMA Contactors and Starters - Tri-State Electrical Supply

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?